This is a modern-English version of A Key Into the Language of America, or an Help to the Language of the Natives in That Part of America Called New-England: Together with Briefe Observations of the Customes, Manners, and Worships, &c. of the Aforesaid Natives, etc., originally written by Williams, Roger. It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.

TRANSCRIBER’S NOTE

TRANSCRIBER'S NOTE

This book was originally published in 1643. The reprinted edition of 1827 retained the errors and misspellings of the original book, and this etext has made only a few minor changes to the English text, which are noted at the end of the book. No changes have been made to accents or (mis)spelling of the native American words.

This book was originally published in 1643. The reprinted edition of 1827 kept the errors and misspellings from the original book, and this etext has made only a few minor changes to the English text, which are noted at the end of the book. No changes have been made to the accents or (mis)spellings of the Native American words.

Punctuation in the two-column dictionary tables has been made more consistent; missing commas or periods have been silently added to the end of table entries. Inconsistent use of question marks has been left unchanged.

Punctuation in the two-column dictionary tables has been made more consistent; missing commas or periods have been quietly added to the end of table entries. The inconsistent use of question marks has been left as is.

Footnote anchors are denoted by [number], and the two footnotes have been placed at the end of the ‘Sketch of the Life of Roger Williams’.

Footnote anchors are represented by [number], and the two footnotes have been positioned at the end of the ‘Sketch of the Life of Roger Williams’.

The Table of Contents can be found at the back of the book, the same placement as in the original book.

The Table of Contents is located at the back of the book, just like in the original version.

The cover image was created by the transcriber and is placed in the public domain.

The cover image was made by the transcriber and is in the public domain.


COLLECTIONS

COLLECTIONS

OF THE

OF THE

RHODE-ISLAND

Rhode Island

HISTORICAL SOCIETY.

History Society.


VOL. I.

VOL. 1.


(Decorative separator)

PROVIDENCE:

PROVIDENCE:

PRINTED BY JOHN MILLER.

PRINTED BY JOHN MILLER.

1827.

1827.


[Pg 3]

[Pg 3]

PREFACE.



In presenting to the public the first volume of the Collections of the Rhode-Island Historical Society, some account of the rise and progress of the Society may not be deemed inappropriate. It may vindicate the society from the charge of remissness in performing the duties it has assumed, and at the same time, remove some of the prejudices which it has had to encounter.

In presenting to the public the first volume of the Collections of the Rhode-Island Historical Society, a brief overview of the Society's beginnings and growth may be seen as fitting. It can justify the Society against accusations of neglecting its responsibilities, while also addressing some of the biases it has had to face.

There have not been wanting, at any time, individuals who have been anxious that the history of this State, and the deeds and sufferings and opinions of the first settlers, should not be handed down to posterity by tradition alone, or that future generations should learn them from the erroneous and imperfect statements of prejudiced historians.

There have always been people who were concerned that the history of this State, along with the actions, struggles, and views of the first settlers, shouldn't be passed down to future generations through tradition alone, or that later generations should learn about them from the inaccurate and incomplete accounts of biased historians.

Much was effected by these individuals in collecting together the scattered fragments and perishing memorials of our early history. But the field was too large and the labor too great to be compassed by the exertions of any individuals, however ardent their zeal. And besides this, many persons who held highly valuable documents, received in most instances from their ancestors, were unwilling to part with them until a secure place of deposite was provided, under the authority of a regularly organized association.

Much was accomplished by these individuals in gathering the scattered pieces and fading records of our early history. However, the task was too vast and the effort too daunting for any single person, no matter how passionate they were. Additionally, many people who possessed valuable documents, mostly handed down from their ancestors, were reluctant to let go of them until a safe place for storage was established under the authority of a properly organized association.

These feelings, aided by various concomitant circumstances, gave rise to the Rhode-Island Historical Society, in the year 1822. In the summer of the same year, a charter of incorporation was obtained, and in July the Society was organized. Since that time, unremitting exertions have been made in[4] effecting its objects, and many valuable documents, both printed and manuscript have been collected. The number of resident members is at present about fifty.

These feelings, along with various other circumstances, led to the formation of the Rhode Island Historical Society in 1822. In the summer of that year, a charter of incorporation was granted, and in July, the Society was officially organized. Since then, continuous efforts have been made to achieve its goals, and many valuable documents, both printed and handwritten, have been gathered. Currently, there are about fifty resident members.

The subject of publishing a Series of Collections was agitated soon after the establishment of the Society. Various circumstances served to retard this project until Zachariah Allen, Esq. a member, presented to the Society a manuscript copy of Roger Williams’ Key to the Indian Language which he had procured from the printed copy in the Bodliean Library at Oxford. This manuscript has since been carefully compared with the printed copy of the same work, in the possession of the Massachusetts Historical Society. At this time, when philosophers are engaged in searching for the origin, and philanthropists, in meliorating the condition, of the aborigines, it was thought by the Society that the publication of this curious and valuable relick of the venerable founder of the State would be particularly acceptable and appropriate; and in the hope that both pleasure and profit may be derived from its perusal, it is now respectfully commended to the attention and favor of the public.

The idea of publishing a Series of Collections was brought up shortly after the Society was established. Various factors delayed this project until Zach Allen, Esq., a member, presented a manuscript copy of Roger Williams’ Key to the Indian Language, which he had obtained from the printed version in the Bodleian Library at Oxford. This manuscript has since been carefully compared with the printed copy of the same work held by the Massachusetts Historical Society. At this time, when philosophers are exploring the origins and philanthropists are working to improve the situation of indigenous people, the Society believed that publishing this intriguing and valuable relic from the esteemed founder of the State would be especially welcomed and fitting; and in the hope that readers will find both enjoyment and benefit in it, we now respectfully recommend it to the attention and support of the public.


[5]

[5]

CHARTER

OF THE RHODE-ISLAND HISTORICAL SOCIETY.

OF THE RHODE ISLAND HISTORICAL SOCIETY.

Whereas Jeremiah Lippitt, William Aplin, Charles Norris Tibbitts, Walter R. Danforth, William R. Staples, Richard W. Greene, John Brown Francis, William G. Goddard, Charles F. Tillinghast, Richard J. Arnold, Charles Jackson, and William E. Richmond, have petitioned this General Assembly to incorporate them into a society, by the name of the Rhode-Island Historical Society: Therefore,

Whereas Jeremiah Lippitt, William Aplin, Charles Norris Tibbitts, Walter R. Danforth, William R. Staples, Richard W. Greene, John Brown Francis, William G. Goddard, Charles F. Tillinghast, Richard J. Arnold, Charles Jackson, and William E. Richmond have requested this General Assembly to form a society called the Rhode Island Historical Society: Therefore,

Section 1. Be it enacted by the General Assembly, and by the authority thereof it is enacted, That the aforesaid persons, together with such others as they shall hereafter associate with them, and their successors, are hereby constituted, ordained and created a body corporate and politic, by the name of The Rhode-Island Historical Society, for the purpose of procuring and preserving whatever relates to the topography, antiquities, and natural, civil and ecclesiastical history of this State; and by the name aforesaid shall have perpetual succession; and by the same name are hereby made able and capable in law, as a body corporate, to have, hold and enjoy goods, chattels, lands and tenements, to the value of five thousand dollars, exclusive of their library, cabinet and historical collections and antiquities, and the same at all times to dispose of; to have a common seal, and the same at pleasure to change and destroy; to sue and be sued, to plead and to be impleaded, to answer and to answer unto, to defend and to be defended against, in all courts of justice and before all proper judges; and to do, act and transact all matters and things whatsoever, proper for bodies corporate to do, act and transact; and to establish and enact such a constitution and such by-laws as shall be deemed necessary and expedient, provided that they be not repugnant to the laws of this State, or of the United States; and to annex to the breach of those laws such fines as they may deem fit.

Section 1. Be it enacted by the General Assembly, and by the authority thereof it is enacted, That the individuals mentioned above, along with any others they choose to associate with in the future, and their successors, are hereby established as a corporate body under the name of The Rhode-Island Historical Society, with the purpose of acquiring and preserving everything related to the geography, history, and both natural and civil aspects of this State; and under this name shall have continuous existence; and by the same name are hereby granted the legal capacity as a corporate body to own, hold, and enjoy personal property, land, and real estate, valued at five thousand dollars, excluding their library, collections, and historical artifacts, and to dispose of the same at any time; to have a common seal, with the ability to change or destroy it at will; to initiate lawsuits and be sued, to plead and be responded to, to defend themselves and be defended against in all courts of justice and before all appropriate judges; and to engage in all activities and transactions that are suitable for corporate entities; and to establish and enact a constitution and by-laws as deemed necessary and appropriate, provided that they do not conflict with the laws of this State or the United States; and to impose fines for violations of those laws as they see fit.

Sec. 2. And be it further enacted, That the said corporation be further authorized and empowered to elect and qualify such officers as may by them be deemed necessary; to be chosen at such time, and to hold their offices for such period, as the constitution of said corporation shall prescribe; and to appoint and hold such meetings as shall be thought proper.

Sec. 2. And be it further enacted, That the corporation is also given the authority to elect and approve any officers they see fit; to choose them at any time, and to serve in their roles for as long as the corporation's constitution specifies; and to schedule and hold any meetings they find appropriate.

Sec. 3. And be it further enacted, That said society shall establish two cabinets for the deposit and safe-keeping of all[6] the ancient documents and records illustrating the history and antiquities of this State; one of said cabinets in the town of Newport, for the safe keeping of the records of the early history of the southern section of the State, and the other in the town of Providence, for the safe-keeping of the historical records of the northern section thereof; and that the anniversary of said society be holden in said Providence.

Sec. 3. And be it further enacted, That said society shall establish two cabinets for the deposit and safe-keeping of all[6] the ancient documents and records illustrating the history and antiquities of this State; one cabinet in the town of Newport, for the safe keeping of the records of the early history of the southern section of the State, and the other in the town of Providence, for the safe-keeping of the historical records of the northern section thereof; and that the anniversary of said society be held in said Providence.

Sec. 4. And be it further enacted, That Jeremiah Lippitt be authorized and empowered to call the first meeting of the corporation, within three months from the granting of this charter, giving public notice of the same.

Sec. 4. And be it further enacted, That Jeremiah Lippitt is authorized and empowered to schedule the first meeting of the corporation within three months from the granting of this charter, providing public notice of the meeting.

(Decorative separator)

CONSTITUTION.

Article 1. The Rhode-Island Historical Society shall consist of resident and honorary members, the former of whom shall be resident in the State of Rhode-Island.

Article 1. The Rhode Island Historical Society will have both resident and honorary members, with the resident members living in the state of Rhode Island.

Art. 2. The annual meeting of the society shall be holden at Providence on the 19th day of July, in every year: And provided, That when that day shall fall on a Sunday, the meeting shall be holden on the Tuesday following: other meetings of the society shall be called at any other time by the President, or other senior officer in the society, by giving notice of the same in at least one public newspaper in Providence and Newport, fourteen days previous to the time proposed, upon application of five members in writing.

Art. 2. The annual meeting of the society will be held in Providence on July 19th each year. And provided, if that day falls on a Sunday, the meeting will take place on the following Tuesday. Additional meetings of the society can be scheduled at any other time by the President or another senior officer, with notice given in at least one public newspaper in Providence and Newport, fourteen days prior to the proposed time, upon request by five members in writing.

Art. 3. The officers of the society shall be—a president, two vice-presidents, a secretary, treasurer, two cabinet-keepers, one for the northern and one for the southern section, and thirteen[1] trustees, of whom the president, two vice-presidents, and treasurer, shall be four.

Art. 3. The officers of the society will be a president, two vice-presidents, a secretary, a treasurer, two cabinet-keepers (one for the northern section and one for the southern section), and thirteen trustees, of whom the president, two vice-presidents, and treasurer will be four.

Art. 4. All the officers of the society shall be chosen at the annual meeting of the society, and shall hold their offices for one year, and until others be elected in their stead: Provided, That when the society shall not meet on the day of their annual meeting, they may elect their officers at any other meeting called pursuant to the article preceding: And provided also, That when any vacancy in any office shall happen during the year, the society, at any such meeting, may fill the same.

Art. 4. All the officers of the society will be elected at the annual meeting of the society and will serve for one year, or until new officers are elected to take their place: Provided, that if the society does not meet on the day of the annual meeting, they can elect their officers at any other meeting called according to the previous article: And provided also, that if any position becomes vacant during the year, the society can fill it at any such meeting.

Art. 5. It shall be the duty of the trustees to receive donations, and to manage and superintend all the concerns of the society; they shall hold meetings as often as occasion shall require, any five being present, public notice being given by the secretary fourteen days previous in a public newspaper of the time and place of meeting, and shall have power[7] to fill any vacancy in their board until the next meeting of the society; they shall at the annual meeting make report in writing of their doings, to the society: the president, and in his absence the senior officer present, shall preside at all meetings of the society and board of trustees: the secretary shall keep a record of all the proceedings of the society, shall be ex officio secretary of the board, and as such, keep a record of their doings, and shall be the organ of communication of the society: the cabinet-keepers shall safely keep all books, papers, ancient memorials, and every thing else belonging to the society, relating to the objects of the society, in such places as may hereafter be designated by the society or board of trustees; they shall also keep catalogues of all donations to the cabinets of the society, with the donor’s name affixed to each, unless otherwise requested by the donor himself; they shall also report in writing at the annual meeting, at which time, the treasurer shall report the state of the treasury.

Art. 5. The trustees are responsible for receiving donations and managing all the affairs of the society. They are to hold meetings as needed, with at least five members present, and the secretary must give public notice of the time and place of the meeting in a public newspaper fourteen days in advance. They have the authority to fill any vacancies on their board until the next society meeting. At the annual meeting, they will provide a written report of their activities to the society. The president, or in their absence, the senior officer present, will lead all meetings of the society and the board of trustees. The secretary will keep a record of all the society's proceedings, act as the secretary of the board, maintain a record of their activities, and serve as the main communication channel for the society. The cabinet-keepers will securely store all books, papers, historical records, and anything else related to the society's objectives in locations designated by the society or the board of trustees. They will also maintain catalogues of all donations to the society's cabinets, including the donor's name, unless the donor requests otherwise. Additionally, they will provide a written report at the annual meeting, during which the treasurer will report on the state of the treasury.

Art. 6. The society shall have power to lay such taxes on the members as may be requisite, provided that they do not exceed the sum of three dollars per year.

Art. 6. The society shall have the authority to impose taxes on the members as needed, as long as they do not exceed three dollars per year.

Art. 7. No person shall be admitted a member of this society unless by ballot, at the annual meeting, by a majority of the members present, and unless he shall be recommended by the board of trustees.

Art. 7. No one will be allowed to become a member of this society unless they are voted in at the annual meeting by a majority of the members present and have received a recommendation from the board of trustees.

Art. 8. Seven resident members, including either the president, one of the vice-presidents, the secretary or treasurer, shall constitute a quorum for doing business.

Art. 8. Seven resident members, including either the president, one of the vice-presidents, the secretary, or the treasurer, will make up a quorum for conducting business.

Art. 9. No alteration or amendment whatever shall be made to this constitution but by vote of two thirds of the members present at the annual meeting, which alteration or amendment shall be reduced to writing by the mover before it shall be acted upon.

Art. 9. No changes or amendments to this constitution can be made unless approved by a two-thirds vote of the members present at the annual meeting. The proposed change or amendment must be written down by the person proposing it before it can be discussed.

(Decorative separator)

The Society would call the attention of members and correspondents to the following subjects:

The Society would like to draw the attention of members and correspondents to the following topics:

1. Topographical sketches of towns and villages, including an account of their soil, agriculture, manufactures, commerce, natural curiosities and statistics.

1. Maps of towns and villages, including an account of their soil, farming, industries, trade, natural wonders, and statistics.

2. Sketches of the history of the settlement and rise of such towns and villages, and of the introduction and progress of commerce, manufactures and the arts, in them.

2. Outlines of the history of the establishment and growth of towns and villages, along with the development and advancement of commerce, manufacturing, and the arts within them.

3. Biographical notices of original settlers, revolutionary patriots, and other distinguished men who have resided in this State.

3. Biographical notes of original settlers, revolutionary patriots, and other notable individuals who have lived in this State.

4. Original letters, and documents, and papers illustrating any of these subjects, particularly those which shew the pri[8]vate habits, manners or pursuits of our ancestors, or are connected with the general history of this State.

4. Original letters, documents, and papers that shed light on these topics, especially those that reveal the private habits, manners, or activities of our ancestors, or that relate to the overall history of this State.

5. Sermons, orations, occasional discourses and addresses, books, pamphlets, almanacs and newspapers, printed in this State; and manuscripts, especially those written by persons born or residing in this State.

5. Sermons, speeches, occasional talks and addresses, books, pamphlets, almanacs, and newspapers printed in this state; and manuscripts, especially those written by people born or living in this state.

6. Accounts of the Indian tribes which formerly inhabited any part of this State, their numbers and condition when first visited by the whites, their general character and peculiar customs and manners, their wars and treaties and their original grants to our ancestors.

6. Accounts of the Native American tribes that used to live in any part of this state, their population and situation when first encountered by white settlers, their overall character and unique customs and behaviors, their conflicts and treaties, and their original land grants to our ancestors.

7. The Indian names of the towns, rivers, islands, bays and other remarkable places within this State, and the traditional import of those names.

7. The Native American names of the towns, rivers, islands, bays, and other notable places within this state, along with the traditional meanings of those names.

8. Besides these, the society will receive donations of any other books, pamphlets, manuscripts and printed documents; with which any gentleman may please to favor them.

8. In addition to these, the society will accept donations of any other books, pamphlets, manuscripts, and printed documents that anyone may wish to contribute.

(Decorative separator)

OFFICERS

OF THE

OF THE

RHODE-ISLAND HISTORICAL SOCIETY,

RHODE ISLAND HISTORICAL SOCIETY,

ELECTED JULY 19, 1826.

Elected July 19, 1826.

His Excellency James Fenner, Esq. President.

President James Fenner

Henry Bull, Esq. 1st. Vice-Pres.

Henry Bull, Esq. 1st VP.

Hon. Theodore Foster, Esq. 2d Vice Pres.

Hon. Theodore Foster, Esq. 2nd Vice Pres.

William R. Staples, Esq. Sec’ry.

William R. Staples, Esq., Secretary.

John Howland, Esq. Treasurer.

John Howland, Esq. Treasurer.

Albert G. Greene, Esq. Cabinet Keeper of the Northern District.

Albert G. Greene, Esq. Cabinet Keeper of the Northern District.

Stephen Gould, Cabinet Keeper of the Southern District.

Stephen Gould, Cabinet Keeper of the Southern District.

Hon. Job Durfee, John B. Francis, John Pitman, Richard W. Greene, Philip Crapo, William E. Richmond, Christopher E. Robbins, Nathaniel Bullock, Hon. Tristam Burges, Hon. William Hunter, Esq’s. Rev. David Benedict, and William G. Goddard, Esq. Trustees.

Hon. Job Durfee, John B. Francis, John Pitman, Richard W. Greene, Philip Crapo, William E. Richmond, Christopher E. Robbins, Nathaniel Bullock, Hon. Tristam Burges, Hon. William Hunter, Esq’s. Rev. David Benedict, and William G. Goddard, Esq. Trustees.

Publishing Committee.

Publishing Team.

John Howland, William G. Goddard and William R. Staples, elected by the Trustees Feb. 7, 1827.

John Howland, William G. Goddard, and William R. Staples, elected by the Trustees on February 7, 1827.


[9]

[9]

SKETCH
LIFE OF
Roger Williams.

Roger Williams was born of reputable parents, in Wales, A. D. 1598. He was educated at the University of Oxford; was regularly admitted to orders in the Church of England, and preached for some time, as a Minister of that Church; but on embracing the doctrines of the Puritans, he rendered himself obnoxious to the laws against non-conformists and embarked for America, where he arrived with his wife, whose name was Mary, on the 5th of February, 1631. In April following, he was called by the Church of Salem, as teaching Elder, under their then Pastor, Mr. Skelton. This proceeding gave offence to the Governor and Assistants of the Massachusetts Bay, and in a short time, he removed to Plymouth, and was engaged as assistant to Mr. Ralph Smith, the pastor of the Church at that place. Here he remained until he found that his views of religious toleration and strict non-conformity gave offence to some of his hearers, when he returned again to Salem, and was settled there, after Mr. Skelton’s death in 1634. While here and while at Plymouth, he maintained the character he had acquired in England, that “of a godly man and a zealous preacher.” He appears, however, to have been viewed by the government of that colony with jealousy from his first entrance into it. He publicly preached against the patent from the king, under which they held their lands, on the ground that the king could not dispose of the lands of the Natives without their consent—he reprobated “the calling of natural men to the exercise of those holy ordinances of prayers, oaths,[10] &c.” and “the frequenting of Parish Churches, under the pretence of hearing some ministers;”[2] but that, without doubt, which rendered him most obnoxious, was his insisting that the magistrate had no right to punish for breaches of the first table; or in other words, “to deal in matters of conscience and religion.” These causes conspiring with others of less importance, finally procured a decree of banishment to be passed against him, in the autumn of 1635, and he was ordered to depart the jurisdiction, in six weeks. Subsequently to this, he was permitted to remain until spring, on condition that he did not attempt to draw any others to his opinions; but “the people being much taken with the apprehension of his godliness,” in the January following the Governor and Assistants sent an officer to apprehend him and carry him on board a vessel then lying at Nantasket, bound to England. But before the officer arrived, he had removed and gone to Rehoboth. Being informed by Governor Winslow of Plymouth, that he was then within the bounds of the Plymouth patent, in the spring he crossed the river, and commenced the settlement of Providence. The field that he first planted composes “Whatcheer,” the present residence of his Excellency, James Fenner, Governor of Rhode-Island, and the land originally set off to Williams adjoining this field, has continued to the present day, in possession of his descendants.

Roger Williams was born to respectable parents in Wales in 1598. He studied at the University of Oxford, was officially ordained in the Church of England, and preached as a minister for a while. However, after adopting Puritan beliefs, he became a target of the laws against non-conformists and moved to America, arriving with his wife Mary on February 5, 1631. In April of that year, he was appointed teaching Elder by the Church of Salem under their Pastor, Mr. Skelton. This caused offense to the Governor and Assistants of Massachusetts Bay, so he soon relocated to Plymouth, where he assisted Mr. Ralph Smith, the pastor there. He stayed until his views on religious tolerance and strict non-conformity upset some members of his congregation, prompting him to return to Salem, where he settled after Mr. Skelton's death in 1634. While he was in Salem and Plymouth, he upheld his reputation in England as "a godly man and a zealous preacher." However, the colony's government appeared to view him with suspicion from the moment he arrived. He publicly preached against the royal patent under which they claimed their land, arguing that the king couldn’t give away Native lands without their consent. He criticized "the calling of natural men to the exercise of those holy ordinances of prayers, oaths, etc." and "frequenting Parish Churches under the pretense of hearing some ministers;" but what truly made him controversial was his assertion that the magistrate had no authority to punish breaches of the first table, or in other words, “to interfere in matters of conscience and religion.” These factors, along with others of lesser significance, led to a decree of banishment against him in the autumn of 1635, ordering him to leave the jurisdiction within six weeks. After this, he was allowed to stay until spring, on the condition that he wouldn’t sway others to his views. However, by January, as "the people were much taken with the idea of his godliness," the Governor and Assistants sent an officer to arrest him and put him on a boat at Nantasket heading for England. Before the officer arrived, he had already moved to Rehoboth. Governor Winslow of Plymouth informed him that he was within the Plymouth patent, so in the spring, he crossed the river and started the settlement of Providence. The initial land he cultivated now comprises Whatcheer, which is the current home of his Excellency, James Fenner, Governor of Rhode Island, and the land originally allotted to Williams next to this field has remained with his descendants to this day.

He afterwards embraced some of the leading opinions of the Baptists, and in March 1639, was baptized by immersion, at Providence, by Ezekiel Holliman, whom he afterwards baptized. He formed a Society of this order, and continued preaching to them for several months, and then separated from them, doubting, it is said, the validity of all baptism, because a direct succession could not be traced from the Apostles to the officiating ministers.

He later adopted some of the main beliefs of the Baptists, and in March 1639, he was baptized by immersion in Providence by Ezekiel Holliman, whom he would later baptize. He established a society of this type and continued to preach to them for several months before parting ways, reportedly questioning the validity of all baptisms because there was no clear line of succession from the Apostles to the ministers performing them.

[11]

[11]

In 1643, Williams went to England as agent for the colonies at Providence, Rhode Island, and Warwick, to solicit a charter of incorporation, which he finally procured, signed by the Earl of Warwick, then Governor and Admiral of the English plantations, and by his Council—bearing date March 14, 1644. On the 17th of September, 1644, he returned from England and landed at Boston, bringing a letter of recommendation to the Governor and Assistants of the Massachusetts Bay, from some of the most influential members of the Long Parliament. This saved him from the penalty incurred by him on entering their bounds, which he avoided at his departure, by taking ship at New-York. In 1651, serious difficulties having been raised in the colony, by Coddington’s procuring a Charter, which gave him almost unlimited authority over the Islands of Narragansett Bay, Williams and Clarke were despatched as agents of the colony, to procure a revocation of it. This they effected in October 1652. Williams returned in 1654, but Clarke remained in England, and procured the second Charter of 1663. While in England at this time Williams resided a principal part of the time, at Belleau, a seat of Sir Henry Vane, in Lincolnshire; and on his return, brought a letter from him, recorded in the records of Providence, inviting the planters to a closer union with one another. This letter, aided by the urgent and constant solicitations of Williams, finally restored peace and union to the colony, which, during his absence, had been rent by many divisions. He was several times both before and after this period, elected to the office of President or Governor of this colony, by the “free vote of the freemen.” He died in April, 1683, at Providence, and was buried under arms, in his family burying ground, with every testimony of respect that the colony could manifest. He was the father of six children: viz. Mary, Freeborn, Providence, Mercy, Daniel, and Joseph; the descendants of whom, at this time, amount to several thousands.

In 1643, Williams went to England as the representative for the colonies at Providence, Rhode Island, and Warwick, to seek a charter of incorporation, which he ultimately obtained, signed by the Earl of Warwick, who was then the Governor and Admiral of the English plantations, and his Council—dated March 14, 1644. On September 17, 1644, he returned from England and arrived in Boston, carrying a letter of recommendation to the Governor and Assistants of the Massachusetts Bay from some of the most influential members of the Long Parliament. This helped him avoid the penalty he incurred by entering their territory, which he evaded by departing from New York. In 1651, serious issues arose in the colony when Coddington obtained a Charter that granted him nearly unlimited power over the Islands of Narragansett Bay. Williams and Clarke were sent as representatives of the colony to get it revoked. They succeeded in this in October 1652. Williams returned in 1654, but Clarke stayed in England and secured the second Charter of 1663. While in England during this time, Williams spent a significant amount of time at Belleau, the estate of Sir Henry Vane in Lincolnshire; and upon his return, he brought back a letter from him, recorded in the Providence records, inviting the settlers to unite more closely with each other. This letter, along with Williams' persistent and strong encouragement, eventually restored peace and unity to the colony, which had been divided during his absence. He was elected multiple times, both before and after this period, to the position of President or Governor of the colony by the “free vote of the freemen.” He died in April 1683 in Providence and was buried with military honors in his family burial ground, receiving every expression of respect that the colony could offer. He was the father of six children: Mary, Freeborn, Providence, Mercy, Daniel, and Joseph; their descendants today number in the thousands.

Very few incidents in his life, are to be collected from the writings of Williams, and the prejudices of[12] contemporary and even later historians who have mentioned him, render it difficult to form a true estimate of his character. Facts, which in the estimation of the writers of those days, would have raised a more orthodox man almost above the level of humanity, are slightly mentioned; and opinions which all protestant nations and even the descendants of his enemies have since fully adopted, in him were heretical and subversive, not only of church but of civil government. From these slight and prejudiced statements must the character of Williams be drawn. They prove him to have been a man of unblemished moral character and of ardent piety, unyielding in opinions which he conceived to be right, and not to be diverted from what he believed to be duty, either by threats or by flattery.

Very few incidents from Williams' life can be found in his writings, and the biases of[12] contemporary and later historians who have written about him make it hard to truly assess his character. Facts that, in the eyes of writers from that time, would have elevated a more conventional individual almost to a divine status are only slightly mentioned; and views that all Protestant nations and even the descendants of his adversaries have fully embraced were seen as heretical and threatening, not just to the church but also to civil authority. From these minimal and biased accounts, we must draw his character. They show him to be a person of impeccable moral integrity and strong faith, unwavering in beliefs he deemed to be right, and not swayed from what he thought was his duty, whether by threats or flattery.

One fact speaks volumes in favor of his Christian temper. After he was banished, he conceived himself to be an injured, persecuted man, but with all the opportunities which his intimacy with the neighboring Indians gave him, no purpose of revenge seems ever to have been harbored by him. Instead of that, the next year after his banishment, he gave to his very persecutors, information of the Indian plot, which would have destroyed their whole settlement. He concluded treaties for them, which ensured their peace and prosperity, “employing himself continually in acts of kindness to his persecutors, affording relief to the distressed, offering an asylum to the persecuted”

One fact really shows his Christian character. After he was banished, he saw himself as a harmed, persecuted man, but despite the opportunities his closeness with the nearby Indians provided, he never seemed to harbor any thoughts of revenge. Instead, the year after his banishment, he informed his very persecutors about the Indian plot that could have wiped out their entire settlement. He concluded treaties for them, which guaranteed their peace and prosperity, “constantly engaging in acts of kindness for his persecutors, providing relief to the distressed, and offering shelter to the persecuted.”

He is accused, and not unjustly, of frequent changes in his religious sentiments. These changes must have been the effect of sincere conviction—they could not have arisen from a time-serving policy. For had he remained an Episcopalian, England and all her comforts, and undoubtedly as due to his Learning, some of the honors of the Church were before him; and had he continued a lukewarm non-conformist, Massachusetts and Plymouth, the society of his former friends and especially that of Hooker and Cotton, might have solaced him in his residence in this new country. But these were all resigned for what he conceived to be his duty to his God. He was however[13] at all times and under all changes, the undaunted champion of Religious Freedom. It was openly professed by him, on his arrival among those who sought in America, a refuge from persecution and strange as it may seem, it was probably the first thing that excited the prejudices of the Massachusetts and Plymouth rulers against him. He was accused of carrying this favorite doctrine so far as to exempt from punishment any criminal who pleaded conscience. But let his own words exculpate him from this charge.

He is accused, and not without reason, of frequently changing his religious beliefs. These changes must have come from a genuine conviction—they couldn’t have been a result of self-serving tactics. For if he had stayed an Episcopalian, England and all its comforts, and certainly due to his knowledge, some of the honors of the Church would have been within reach; and if he had remained a lukewarm non-conformist, Massachusetts and Plymouth, along with the company of his former friends, especially Hooker and Cotton, might have provided him comfort in this new land. But he gave all that up for what he believed was his duty to God. He was, however[13] at all times and under all circumstances, the fearless champion of Religious Freedom. He openly declared this upon his arrival among those who sought refuge from persecution in America, and strangely enough, it was likely the very first thing that aroused the prejudices of the Massachusetts and Plymouth authorities against him. He was accused of taking this cherished principle so far as to excuse any criminal who claimed conscience as a defense. But let his own words clear him of this accusation.

“That ever I should speak or write a tittle that tends to such an infinite liberty of conscience, is a mistake, and which I have ever disclaimed and abhorred. To prevent such mistakes, I at present shall only propose this case. There goes many a ship to sea with many hundred souls in one ship, whose weal and woe is common; and is a true picture of a common-wealth, or an human combination or society. It hath fallen out, some times, that both Papists and Protestants, Jews and Turks, may be embarked into one ship. Upon which supposal, I affirm that all the liberty of conscience, that ever I pleaded for, turns upon these two hinges, That none of the Papists, Protestants, Jews or Turks, be forced to come to the ship’s prayers or worship; nor compelled from their own particular prayers or worship, if they practice any. I further add, that I never denied, that notwithstanding this liberty, the commander of this ship ought to command the ship’s course; yea, and also command that justice, peace and sobriety be kept and practiced, both among the seamen and all the passengers. If any of the seamen refuse to perform their service, or passengers to pay their freight; if any refuse to help in person or purse, toward the common charges or defence; if any refuse to obey the common laws and orders of the ship concerning their common peace or preservation; if any shall mutiny and rise up against their commanders and officers; if any should preach or write, that there ought to be no commanders nor officers, because all are equal in Christ, therefore no masters nor officers, no laws nor orders, no corrections nor punishments; I say, I never[14] denied but in such cases, whatever is pretended, the commander or commanders may judge, resist, compel and punish such transgressors, according to their deserts and merits.”

"That I would ever speak or write anything that suggests absolute freedom of conscience is a misunderstanding, and one that I have always rejected and detested. To avoid such misunderstandings, I will currently present this situation. There are many ships that go to sea carrying hundreds of people whose well-being and suffering are shared; this is a true representation of a commonwealth or a human community or society. It has happened sometimes that both Catholics and Protestants, Jews and Muslims, may be on the same ship. Based on this assumption, I assert that all the freedom of conscience I've ever advocated rests on these two key points: No Catholics, Protestants, Jews, or Muslims should be forced to participate in the ship’s prayers or worship, nor should they be compelled to abandon their own personal prayers or worship, if they have any. I also want to clarify that I have never denied that, despite this freedom, the captain of the ship should direct the ship’s course; yes, and also ensure that justice, peace, and self-control are maintained and practiced among both the crew and all the passengers. If any crew members refuse to do their jobs or if any passengers refuse to pay their fare; if anyone declines to contribute personally or financially towards common expenses or defense; if anyone disobeys the shared laws and orders of the ship regarding their collective safety or well-being; if anyone were to mutiny and rise against their captains and officers; if anyone were to preach or write that there should be no captains or officers because everyone is equal in Christ, therefore no masters or officers, no laws or orders, no corrections or punishments; I say I have never denied that in such cases, regardless of what is claimed, the captain or captains may judge, resist, compel, and punish such offenders according to their actions and merits."

And in Williams’ political transactions, self interest does not appear to have had any influence, in opposition to the public good. The title to Providence Plantations, from the Indians, was in him and in him alone, by their deed. Yet almost his first act was to divide it among his “loving neighbors” reserving to himself only an equal right with them. In the charter procured by him, no office of trust or profit was conferred on him. Of what other agent employed on such business, can the same be said? Well might Calender call him, “the most disinterested man that ever lived.”

And in Williams' political dealings, he doesn't seem to have let self-interest interfere with the public good. The title to Providence Plantations, granted by the Indians, belonged to him and him alone, according to their deed. Yet his first action was to share it with his "loving neighbors," keeping only an equal right for himself. In the charter he secured, he wasn't given any position of trust or profit. Who else involved in such matters can say the same? It’s no wonder Calender called him “the most selfless man that ever lived.”

The publications of Williams, that have reached us, are not voluminous. The public services in which he was engaged, and the private difficulties which he had to encounter, undoubtedly prevented them from being so. The first, in order of time, is his “Key to the Language of America,” now republished. This, it would seem, was composed during his voyage to England in 1643, and was printed at London soon after his arrival. It preceded Elliot’s publications on the same subject, and was highly commended by the Board of Trade, at the time it was published. Very few copies of the original edition are now extant. The one belonging to the Massachusetts Historical Society is the only one known to be in this country. A strain of ardent piety runs through this work which cannot fail to recommend both itself and its author to the reader. It presents the character of the Natives in a new and favorable light, and appears to have been admirably calculated to facilitate that intercouse with them, which the safety of the settlers and the interests of both settlers and natives imperiously demanded.

The writings of Williams that have come down to us aren’t very numerous. His public duties and personal challenges clearly held him back from producing more. The first piece, chronologically, is his “Key to the Language of America,” now republished. This was apparently written during his trip to England in 1643 and printed in London shortly after he arrived. It came before Elliot's works on the same topic and received high praise from the Board of Trade upon its release. Very few copies of the original edition still exist. The one held by the Massachusetts Historical Society is the only known copy in this country. There's a strong sense of deep devotion throughout this work that undoubtedly appeals to readers and highlights both the work and its author. It portrays the Native Americans in a new and positive light and seems to have been exceptionally well-designed to promote interaction with them, which was essential for the safety of the settlers and the interests of both parties.

The next work was his “Bloody Tenent,” written in answer to Cotton’s work upholding the right and enforcing the duty of the civil magistrate to regulate the doctrines of the Church. This work called[15] forth a reply from Cotton, entitled “The Bloody Tenent, Washed and made White in the blood of the Lambe.” And this was followed by a rejoinder from Williams, entitled “The Bloody Tenent yet more Bloody, by Mr. Cotton’s endeavor to Wash it White.” In these works of Williams the doctrine of religious liberty and unlimited toleration are illustrated in strong language and supported by stronger arguments—arguments that preceded those of Locke, Bayle and Furneau. The character and standing of Cotton made him an antagonist, with whom to contend, was glorious, even though vanquished, but with truth on his side, and supported and strengthened by a sense of it, Williams entered the contest, and was not vanquished. Accompanying this last, are two letters, one to Gov. Endicott and the other to the Clergy of Great-Britain and Ireland. The first of which, if it had been read with the spirit in which it appears to have been written, would have stayed the arm of Persecution in New-England. These were published in London in 1652. About twenty years after, Williams had a controversy with the Quakers. He maintained a public dispute with them at Newport, on the 9th, 10th and 12th, and at Providence, on the 17th August, 1672. Afterwards he published his “George Fox digged out of his Burrows,” in answer to a work of Fox. This is a rare book.

The next work was his “Bloody Tenent,” written in response to Cotton’s work supporting the right and enforcing the duty of the civil magistrate to regulate the doctrines of the Church. This work called[15] prompted a reply from Cotton, titled “The Bloody Tenent, Washed and made White in the blood of the Lambe.” This was followed by a response from Williams, named “The Bloody Tenent yet more Bloody, by Mr. Cotton’s endeavor to Wash it White.” In these works, Williams illustrated the doctrine of religious liberty and unlimited toleration using strong language and even stronger arguments—arguments that came before those of Locke, Bayle, and Furneau. The character and reputation of Cotton made him a glorious antagonist to face, even if defeated, but with truth on his side and reinforced by a sense of it, Williams entered the contest and was not defeated. Accompanying this last work are two letters, one to Gov. Endicott and the other to the Clergy of Great Britain and Ireland. The first of these, if it had been read with the spirit it seems to have been written in, would have halted the hand of Persecution in New England. These were published in London in 1652. About twenty years later, Williams had a dispute with the Quakers. He engaged in a public debate with them at Newport on the 9th, 10th, and 12th, and at Providence on the 17th of August, 1672. Later, he published his “George Fox digged out of his Burrows,” in response to a work by Fox. This is a rare book.

In regard to the literary attainments of Roger Williams it is deemed proper to say but little. The readers of this work will be principally such as chuse to form their own opinions. It will be, however, generally admitted, that his Style, abounds with the Beauties and Defects, peculiar to the Literature of his own Times. It is no small praise to say of him, that, as an author, he compares well with his great opponent, Cotton. Both indulge in the same apposite, but somewhat profuse use of Scripture allusion and Phraseology; both are at home in the Classics and the Fathers, and surprise us with quaint erudition; both fight with the same weapon of controversy—the ancient scholastic Logic.

When it comes to the literary achievements of Roger Williams, it’s best to say very little. The readers of this work will mainly be those who choose to form their own opinions. However, it will generally be agreed that his style is full of the strengths and weaknesses typical of the literature of his time. It's quite commendable to say that, as an author, he holds up well against his great opponent, Cotton fabric. Both authors have a similar, somewhat extensive use of Scriptural references and language; both are well-versed in the Classics and the Church Fathers, and impress us with their unique knowledge; both engage in debate using the same tool of ancient scholastic logic.

Those who have a partiality for Williams will justify[16] that partiality, by the conciliating liberality of his doctrines, and the philosophic philanthropy of his sentiments, which impart a peculiar amenity to his diction, and to his reasoning, an air of common sense deduction and equitable and rational conclusion, more satisfactory than the most refined subtilties of dialectic skill.

Those who favor Williams will defend that preference by highlighting the friendly openness of his ideas and the thoughtful compassion of his beliefs, which add a unique charm to his words and make his reasoning feel grounded, fair, and logical—more satisfying than the most sophisticated tricks of debate.

No description of the person of Williams has reached us, but Rhode-Islanders will always remember his name and his deeds, and revere him as the father of their State, and the world will ever regard him as the earliest and boldest champion of the right of all men “fully to have and enjoy their own judgments and consciences, in matters of religious concernments.”

No description of Williams has come to us, but the people of Rhode Island will always remember his name and his actions, honoring him as the father of their State. The world will forever see him as the first and bravest advocate for everyone's right “to fully have and enjoy their own judgments and consciences in matters of religious beliefs.”

FOOTNOTES:

[1] Amended at the annual meeting A. D. 1826, and three trustees added.

[1] Updated at the annual meeting in 1826, with three trustees added.

[2] This censure refers to those who had not separated from the Established Church, before they left England, as well as to those who on visiting England, attended the Parish Churches there.

[2] This criticism applies to those who hadn’t distanced themselves from the Established Church before leaving England, as well as to those who, when visiting England, went to the Parish Churches there.


A KEY
INTO THE
American Language,

OR AN

OR AN

HELP TO THE LANGUAGE OF THE NATIVES IN
THAT PART OF AMERICA CALLED

HELP TO THE LANGUAGE OF THE NATIVES IN
THAT PART OF AMERICA CALLED

New-England;

New England

TOGETHER WITH BRIEFE OBSERVATIONS OF THE CUSTOMES,
MANNERS, AND WORSHIPS, &c. OF THE AFORESAID

TOGETHER WITH BRIEF OBSERVATIONS OF THE CUSTOMS,
MANNERS, AND WORSHIP, etc. OF THE AFORESAID

NATIVES,

Natives,

IN PEACE AND WARRE, IN LIFE AND DEATH.

IN PEACE AND WAR, IN LIFE AND DEATH.

On all which are added,

On all of which are added

SPIRITUALL OBSERVATIONS GENERALL AND PARTICULAR, BY
THE AUTHOUR, OF CHIEFE AND SPECIALL USE (UPON
ALL OCCASIONS) TO ALL THE ENGLISH INHABITING
THOSE PARTS; YET PLEASANT AND
PROFITABLE TO THE VIEW OF
ALL MEN.

SPIRITUAL OBSERVATIONS, GENERAL AND SPECIFIC, BY
THE AUTHOR, OF MAIN AND UNIQUE IMPORTANCE (FOR
EVERY OCCASION) TO ALL THE ENGLISH LIVING IN
THOSE AREAS; STILL ENGAGING AND
BENEFICIAL FOR THE INSIGHT OF
ALL PEOPLE.



By ROGER WILLIAMS,

By ROGER WILLIAMS,

Of Providence, in New-England.

Of Providence, Rhode Island.



LONDON.
PRINTED BY GREGORY DEXTER.
1643.

LONDON.
PRINTED BY GREGORY DEXTER.
1643.


[17]

[17]

TO
MY DEARE AND WELBELOVED FRIENDS
AND COUNTREYMEN, IN OLD AND
NEW ENGLAND.

I present you with a Key; I have not heard of the like, yet framed, since it pleased God to bring that mighty continent of America to light: others of my Countreymen, have often and excellently, and lately written of the Countrey (and none that I know beyond the goodnesse and worth of it.)

I give you a Key; I haven't heard of anything like it since God allowed that vast continent of America to be discovered. Other people from my country have frequently and brilliantly written about the land, and none that I know have done so without recognizing its goodness and value.

This Key, respects the native language of it, and happily may unlocke some Rarities concerning the natives themselves, not yet discovered.

This Key respects its native language and may happily unlock some unique things about the natives themselves that have not yet been discovered.

I drew the materialls in a rude lumpe at Sea, as a private helpe to my owne memory, that I might not by my present absence lightly lose what I had so dearely bought in some few yeares hardship and charges among the Barbarians; yet being reminded by some, what pitie it were to bury those Materialls in my Grave at land or sea; and withall, remembring how oft I have been importun’d by worthy friends of all sorts, to afford them some helps this way.

I jotted down the materials in a rough form at sea, just to help my own memory, so I wouldn’t easily forget what I had worked so hard and spent so much on over the years with the Barbarians. But I was reminded by some that it would be a shame to bury those materials with me, whether on land or at sea. Plus, I remembered how often I’ve been urged by good friends of all kinds to provide them with some assistance in this way.

I resolved (by the assistance of the most High) to[18] cast those Materials into this Key, pleasant and profitable for All, but specially for my friends residing in those parts:

I decided (with the help of the Most High) to[18] put those materials into this key, enjoyable and valuable for everyone, but especially for my friends living in those areas:

A little Key may open a Box, where lies a bunch of Keyes.

A small key can unlock a box that contains a bunch of keys.

With this I have entred into the secrets of those Countries, where ever English dwel about two hundred miles, betweene the French and Dutch Plantations; for want of this, I know what grosse mistakes my selfe and others have run into.

With this, I have delved into the secrets of those countries where English people live, about two hundred miles between the French and Dutch settlements. Because of this, I understand the significant mistakes I and others have made.

There is a mixture of this Language North and South, from the place of my abode, about six hundred miles; yet within the two hundred miles (aforementioned) their Dialects doe exceedingly differ; yet not so, but (within that compasse) a man may by this helpe, converse with thousands of Natives all over the Countrey: and by such converse it may please the Father of Mercies to spread civilitie (and in his owne most holy season) Christianitie; for one Candle will light ten thousand, and it may please God to blesse a little Leaven to season the mightie lump of those Peoples and Territories.

There’s a blend of this language from the North and South, about six hundred miles from where I live; however, within the two hundred miles I mentioned, their dialects differ significantly. Still, within that range, someone can use this help to communicate with thousands of locals all over the country. Through such communication, it may please the Father of Mercies to spread civility (and in His own most holy time) Christianity; for one candle can light ten thousand, and it may please God to bless a little leaven to influence the large mass of those people and lands.

It is expected, that having had so much converse with these Natives, I should write some little of them.

It’s expected that after talking so much with these locals, I should write a bit about them.

Concerning them (a little to gratifie expectation) I shall touch upon foure Heads:

Concerning them (a little to satisfy expectations) I will cover four main points:

First, by what Names they are distinguished.

First, by what names they are known.

Secondly, Their Originall and Descent.

Secondly, Their Origin and Descent.

Thirdly, their Religion, Manners, Customes, &c.

Thirdly, their religion, customs, manners, etc.

Fourthly, That great Point of their Conversion.

Fourthly, the key aspect of their conversion.

To the first, their Names are of two Sorts:

To the first, their names are of two types:

First, those of the English giving: as Natives, Savages, Indians, Wild-men, (so the Dutch call[19] them Wilden) Abergeny men, Pagans, Barbarians, Heathen.

First, those of the English giving: as Natives, Savages, Indians, Wild-men, (that's what the Dutch call[19] them Wilden) Aboriginal people, Pagans, Barbarians, Heathens.

Secondly, their names, which they give themselves.

Secondly, the names they choose for themselves.

I cannot observe, that they ever had (before the comming of the English, French, or Dutch amongst them) any Names to difference themselves from strangers, for they knew none; but two sorts of names they had, and have amongst themselves.

I can't see that they ever had (before the arrival of the English, French, or Dutch among them) any names to distinguish themselves from outsiders, because they didn't know any; but they had and still have two kinds of names among themselves.

First, generall, belonging to all Natives, as Nínnuock, Ninnimissinûwock, Eniskeetompaûwog, which signifies Men, Folke or People.

First, generally, belonging to all Natives, as Nínnuock, Ninnimissinûwock, Eniskeetompaûwog, which means Men, Folk or People.

Secondly, particular names, peculiar to severall Nations of them amongst themselves, as Nanhigganêuck, Massachusêuck, Cawasumséuck, Cowwesêuck, Quintikóock, Quinnipiéuck, Pequttóog, &c.

Secondly, specific names unique to various Nations among themselves, such as Nanhigganêuck, Massachusêuck, Cawasumséuck, Cowwesêuck, Quintikóock, Quinnipiéuck, Pequttóog, etc.

They have often asked mee, why wee call them Indians, Natives, &c. and understanding the reason, they will call themselves Indians in opposition to English &c.

They have often asked me why we call them Indians, Natives, etc., and understanding the reason, they will call themselves Indians in contrast to the English, etc.

For the second Head proposed, their Originall and Descent.

For the second main point proposed, their origin and descent.

From Adam and Noah that they spring, it is granted on all hands.

From Adam and Noah, it is agreed that they originate.

But for their later Descent and whence they came into those parts, it seemes as hard to finde, as to finde the well head of some fresh Streame, which running many miles out of the Countrey to the salt Ocean, hath met with many mixing Streames by the way. They say themselves, that they have sprung and growne up in that very place, like the very trees of the wildernesse.

But figuring out their origins and how they ended up in that area seems as difficult as finding the source of a freshwater stream that flows for miles through the countryside before reaching the salty ocean, and has encountered many mixed waters along the way. They claim they were born and raised right there, just like the trees in the wilderness.

They say that their Great God Cowtantowwit created those parts, as I observed in the Chapter of their[20] Religion. They have no Clothes, Bookes, nor Letters, and conceive their Fathers never had; and therefore they are easily perswaded that the God that made Englishmen is a greater God, because Hee hath so richly endowed the English above themselves: But when they heare that about sixteen hundred yeeres agoe, England and the Inhabitants thereof were like unto themselves, and since have received from God, Clothes, Bookes, &c. they are greatly affected with a secret hope concerning themselves.

They say that their Great God Cowtantowwit created those places, as I saw in the Chapter of their[20] Religion. They have no clothes, books, or letters, and believe their ancestors never had any; so they are easily convinced that the God who made English people is a greater God because He has blessed the English far beyond themselves. But when they learn that about sixteen hundred years ago, England and its inhabitants were much like them, and since then have received from God clothes, books, etc., they are deeply moved by a hidden hope for themselves.

Wise and judicious men with whom I have discoursed, maintaine their originall to be Northward from Tartaria: and at my now taking ship, at the Dutch Plantation, it pleased the Dutch Governour (in some discourse with mee about the natives) to draw their Line from Iceland, because the name Sackmakan (the name for an Indian Prince, about the Dutch) is the name for a Prince in Iceland.

Wise and sensible people I've talked to believe their origins are from the north, near Tartaria. When I just boarded a ship at the Dutch Plantation, the Dutch Governor mentioned in our conversation about the natives that their line extends from Iceland. This is interesting because the name Sackmakan, which refers to an Indian Prince among the Dutch, is also a title for a prince in Iceland.

Other opinions I could number up: under favour I shall present (not mine opinion, but) my observations to the judgement of the wise.

Other opinions I could list: with support I will present (not my opinion, but) my observations for the judgment of the wise.

First, others (and myselfe) have conceived some of their words to hold affinitie with the Hebrew.

First, others (and I) have thought that some of their words are similar to Hebrew.

Secondly, they constantly anoint their heads as the Jewes did.

Secondly, they continuously anoint their heads just like the Jews did.

Thirdly, they give Dowries for their wives as the Jewes did.

Thirdly, they provide dowries for their wives, just like the Jews did.

Fourthly (and which I have not so observed amongst other nations as amongst the Jewes, and these) they constantly seperate their women (during the time of their monthly sicknesse) in a little house alone by themselves foure or five dayes, and hold it an Irreligious thing for either Father or Husband or any Male to come neere them.

Fourthly (and I've not noticed this among other nations as I have among the Jews), they consistently isolate their women (during their monthly cycle) in a small house by themselves for four or five days, considering it disrespectful for any male, whether father or husband, to come near them.

[21]

[21]

They have often asked me if it bee so with women of other nations, and whether they are so separated: and for their practice they plead Nature and Tradition. Yet againe I have found a greater affinity of their language with the Greek tongue.

They have often asked me if it's the same with women from other nations and whether they are similarly isolated. For their reasoning, they rely on Nature and Tradition. However, I have found a stronger connection between their language and Greek.

2. As the Greekes and other nations, and our selves call the seven starres (or Charles Waine, the beare,) so doe they Mosk, or Paukunnawaw the beare.

2. Just like the Greeks and other nations, as well as ourselves, refer to the seven stars (or Charles's Wain, the bear), they also call it Mosk or Paukunnawaw the bear.

3. They have many strange Relations of one Wétucks, a man that wrought great Miracles amongst them, and walking upon the waters, &c. with some kind of broken resemblance to the Sonne of God.

3. They have many strange stories about one Wétucks, a man who performed great miracles among them, like walking on water, etc., somewhat resembling the Son of God.

Lastly, it is famous that the Sowwest (Sowaniu) is the great subject of their discourse. From thence their Traditions. There they say (at the South west) is the Court of their Great God Cautántouwit: at the South-west are their forefathers soules: to the South west they goe themselves when they dye; From the South west came their Corne, and Beanes out of their great God Cautántowwits field: and indeed the further Northward and Westward from us their Corne will not grow, but to the Southward better and better. I dare not conjecture in these Vncertainties, I believe they are lost, and yet hope (in the Lords holy season) some of the wildest of them shall be found to share in the blood of the Son of God. To the third head, concerning their Religion, Customes, Manners &c. I shall here say nothing, because in those 32 chapters of the whole book, I have briefly touched those of all sorts, from their birth to their burialls, and have endeavoured (as the nature of the worke would give way) to bring some short observations and applications home to Europe from America.

Lastly, it’s well known that the Southwest (Sowaniu) is the main topic of their conversations. From there come their Traditions. They say that in the Southwest is the Court of their Great God Cautántouwit; in the Southwest are the souls of their ancestors; they go to the Southwest when they die. Their corn and beans come from the field of their great God Cautántouwit, and indeed, the further North and West you go from us, their corn won’t grow, but the yield improves the further South you go. I don’t want to speculate in these uncertainties; I believe they are lost, yet I hope (in the Lord’s holy season) that some of the wildest among them will be found to share in the blood of the Son of God. Regarding the third topic, which concerns their Religion, Customs, Manners, etc., I won’t say anything here because in those 32 chapters of the whole book, I have briefly covered all sorts, from their birth to their burials, and have tried (as the nature of the work allows) to bring some concise observations and applications from America back to Europe.

[22]

[22]

Therefore fourthly, to that great point of their conversion so much to bee longed for, and by all New-English so much pretended, and I hope in Truth.

Therefore, fourthly, regarding that important aspect of their conversion which everyone in New England longs for, and which I hope is genuine.

For my selfe I have uprightly laboured to suite my endeavours to my pretences: and of later times (out of desire to attaine their Language) I have run through varieties of Intercourses with them Day and Night, Summer and Winter, by Land and Sea, particular passages tending to this, I have related divers, in the Chapter of their Religion.

For my part, I have worked hard to align my efforts with my goals: and recently (in my desire to learn their language) I have engaged in various interactions with them day and night, throughout the seasons, by land and sea. I have shared several specific experiences related to this in the chapter on their religion.

Many solemne discourses I have had with all sorts of nations of them, from one end of the Countrey to another (so farre as opportunity, and the little language I have could reach.)

Many serious conversations I’ve had with all kinds of people from different parts of the country (as much as my limited language skills and available opportunities allowed).

I know there is no small preparations in the hearts of multitudes of them. I know their many solemne confesions to my self, and one to another of their lost wandring conditions.

I know there are no small preparations in the hearts of many of them. I know their numerous serious confessions to myself and to each other about their lost, wandering condition.

I know strong Convictions upon the Consciences of many of them, and their desires uttred that way.

I understand the strong beliefs many of them hold in their hearts, and they clearly express their desires in that direction.

I know not with how little Knowledge and Grace of Christ the Lord may save, and therefore neither will despair or report much.

I don’t know how little knowledge and grace of Christ the Lord can save, so I won’t lose hope or make exaggerated claims.

But since it hath pleased some of my worthy Countrymen to mention (of late in print) Wequash, the Pequt Captaine, I shall be bold so farre to second their relations, as to relate mine own hopes of him (though I dare not be so confident as others.)

But since some of my distinguished countrymen have recently mentioned in print Wequash, the Pequot captain, I feel bold enough to support their accounts by sharing my own hopes for him (even though I’m not as confident as they are).

Two dayes before his death, as I past up to Quinnihticut River it pleased my worthy friend Mr. Fenwick whom I visited at his house in Say-Brook Fort at the mouth of that River, to tell me that my old friend Wequash lay very sick: I desired to see him, and Himselfe was pleased to be my Guide two mile where Wequash lay.

Two days before his death, as I was traveling up to the Connecticut River, my good friend Mr. Fenwick, whom I visited at his house in Saybrook Fort at the mouth of that river, told me that my old friend Wequash was very sick. I wanted to see him, and he kindly offered to be my guide for two miles to where Wequash was.

[23]

[23]

Amongst other discourse concerning his sicknesse and Death (in which hee freely bequeathed his son to Mr. Fenwick) I closed with him concerning his Soule: Hee told me that some two or three yeare before he had lodged at my House, where I acquainted him with the Condition of all mankind, and his own in particular, how God created Man and All things: how Man fell from God, and of his present Enmity against God, and the wrath of God against Him until Repentance: said he, “your words were never out of my heart to this present;” and said hee “me much pray to Jesus Christ.” I told him so did many English, French and Dutch, who had never turned to God, nor loved Him: He replyed in broken English: “me so big naughty Heart, me heart all one stone!” Savory expressions using to breath from compunct and broken Hearts, and a sence of inward hardnesse and unbrokennesse. I had many discourses with him in his Life, but this was the summe of our last parting untill our generall meeting.

Among other discussions about his illness and death (in which he freely entrusted his son to Mr. Fenwick), I spoke with him about his soul: He told me that two or three years before he stayed at my house, I had shared with him the condition of all mankind and his own situation in particular, explaining how God created man and everything, how man fell from God, and of his current hostility towards God, as well as God’s wrath against him until he repents. He said, “Your words have never left my heart since then,” and added, “I pray to Jesus Christ a lot.” I told him that many English, French, and Dutch people did the same, yet had never turned to God or loved Him. He replied in broken English: “I have such a big naughty heart; my heart is like a stone!” These were heartfelt expressions that revealed his sense of internal hardness and unresolved issues. I had many conversations with him throughout his life, but this was the essence of our last farewell until our eventual reunion.

Now because this is the great Inquiry of all men what Indians have been converted? what have the English done in those parts? what hopes of the Indians receiving the knowledge of Christ!

Now, because this is the big question for everyone: which Indians have been converted? What have the English done in those areas? What are the hopes of the Indians gaining the knowledge of Christ?

And because to this Question some put an edge from the boast of the Jesuits in Canada and Maryland, and especially from the wonderfull conversions made by the Spaniards and Portugalls in the West-Indies, besides what I have here written, as also, besides what I have observed in the Chapter of their Religion; I shall further present you with a brief additionall discourse concerning this Great Point, being comfortably perswaded that that Father of Spirits, who was graciously pleased to perswade Japhet (the Gen[24]tiles) to dwell in the Tents of Shem (the Jewes) will in his holy season (I hope approaching) perswade these Gentiles of America to partake of the mercies of Europe, and then shall bee fulfilled what is written by the Prophet Malachi, from the rising of the Sunne (in Europe) to the going down of the same (in America) my name shall be great among the Gentiles. So I desire to hope and pray,

And because some people take issue with this question, citing the claims of Jesuits in Canada and Maryland, and especially the amazing conversions made by the Spaniards and Portuguese in the West Indies, in addition to what I have written here and what I have noted in the chapter about their religion, I want to add a brief additional discussion about this significant topic. I am confidently convinced that the Father of Spirits, who kindly persuaded Japheth (the Gentiles) to dwell in the tents of Shem (the Jews), will, in His holy time (which I hope is coming soon), persuade these Gentiles of America to receive the mercies of Europe. Then what the Prophet Malachi wrote will be fulfilled: from the rising of the sun (in Europe) to its setting (in America), my name will be honored among the Gentiles. So, I hope and pray for that.

Your unworthy Country-man,
ROGER WILLIAMS.

Your unworthy countryman,
ROGER WILLIAMS.


[25]

[25]

DIRECTIONS FOR THE USE OF THE LANGUAGE.

1. A dictionary or Grammer way I had consideration of, but purposely avoided, as not so accommodate to the benefit of all, as I hope, this forme is.

1. I thought about using a dictionary or grammar guide, but I intentionally avoided them because I believe this format is more beneficial for everyone.

2. A Dialogue also I had thoughts of, but avoided for brevities sake, and yet (with no small paines) I have so framed every Chapter and the matter of it, as I may call it an implicite Dialogue.

2. I also thought about having a dialogue, but I avoided it for the sake of brevity. Still, with considerable effort, I have shaped every chapter and its content in a way that I can call it an implicit dialogue.

3. It is framed chiefly after the Narrogánset Dialect, because most Spoken in the Countrey, and yet (with attending to the variation of peoples and Dialects) it will be of great use in all parts of the Countrey.

3. It is mainly based on the Narrogánset Dialect, as it is the most commonly spoken in the region, and yet (considering the differences among various people and dialects) it will be very useful in all areas of the country.

4. Whatever your occasion bee either of Travell, Discourse, Trading &c. turne to the Table which will direct you to the Proper Chapter.

4. No matter what your occasion is—whether it's travel, conversation, trading, etc.—turn to the table that will guide you to the right chapter.

5. Because the Life of all Language is in the Pronuntiation, I have been at the paines and charges to Cause the Accents, Tones or sounds to be affixed, (which some understand according to the Greeke Language, Acutes, Graves, Circumflexes) for example, in the second Leafe in the word Ewò He: the Sound or tone must not be put on E, but Wò, where the grave accent is.

5. Because the essence of any language lies in its pronunciation, I have taken the effort and expense to have the accents, tones, or sounds added (which some understand in relation to the Greek language as acutes, graves, circumflexes). For example, on the second page in the word Ewò He, the emphasis or tone should not be placed on E, but on Wò, where the grave accent is.

In the same Leafe, in the word Ascowequássin, the sound must not be on any of the Syllables, but on quáss, where the Acute or Sharp sound is.

In the same leaf, in the word Ascowequássin, the emphasis should not be on any of the syllables, but on quáss, where the sharp sound is.

[26]

[26]

In the same leafe, in the word Anspaumpmaûntam, the Sound must not be on any other Syllable but Maûn where the Circumflex or long sounding Accent is.

In the same leaf, in the word Anspaumpmaûntam, the stress must only be on the syllable Maûn where the circumflex or long sound accent is.

6. The English for every Indian word or phrase stands in a straight line directly against the Indian: yet sometimes there are two words for the same thing (for their Language is exceeding copious, and they have five or six words sometimes for one thing) and then the English stands against them both; for example in the second leafe.

6. The English translation for every Indian word or phrase lines up directly next to the Indian: but sometimes there are two words for the same thing (because their language is very rich, and they can have five or six words for one concept) and then the English corresponds to both; for example, in the second leaf.

Cowáuncakmish
and I pray your favour.
Cuckquénamish,

[27]

[27]

AN HELPE
TO THE NATIVE LANGUAGE

OF THAT PART OF AMERICA CALLED

OF THAT PART OF AMERICA CALLED

New-England.

New England.

(Decorative separator)

CHAPTER I.


Of Salutation.—Observation.

The natives are of two sorts (as the English are) some more rude and clownish, who are not so apt to salute, but upon salutation resalute lovingly. Others, and the generall, are sober and grave, and yet cheerfull in a meane, and as ready to begin a salutation as to resalute, which yet the English generally begin, out of desire to civilize them.

The locals come in two types (like the English do): some are more unsophisticated and rough, and they don't greet first, but when greeted, they respond warmly. The others, who are the majority, are serious and dignified, yet moderately cheerful, and they are just as quick to greet someone as they are to respond to a greeting, although it’s usually the English who start the greetings in an effort to civilize them.

What cheare Nétop is the general salutation of all English toward them. Nétop is friend. Netompaûog, Friends.

What cheer Nétop is the general greeting of all English people towards them. Nétop means friend. Netompaûog, friends.

They are exceedingly delighted with Salutations in their own Language.

They are very pleased with greetings in their own language.

Neèn, Keèn, Ewò, I, you, he.
Keénkaneen, You and I.
Ascowequássin,
Ascowequassunnúmmis, Good morrow.
Askuttaaquompsín, Hou doe you?
Asnpaumpmaúntam, I am very well.
Taubút paump maúntaman, I am glad you are well.
Cowaúnckamish, My service to you.

[28]

[28]

OBSERVATION.

This word upon speciall Salutations they use, and upon some offence conceived by the Sachim or Prince against any; I have seen the party reverently doe obeysance, by stroking the Prince upon both his sholders, and using this word,

This word is used for special greetings and when someone feels offended by the Sachim or Prince. I've seen the person respectfully bow down by stroking the Prince's shoulders and saying this word.

Cowaúnckamish and
Cuckquénamish, I pray your favour.
Cowaúnkamuck, He salutes you.
Aspaumpmáuntam Sachim, How doth the Prince?
Aspaumpmaúntam commíttamus, How doth your wife?
Aspaumpmaúntamwock How doth your children?
cummuckiaûg?
Konkeeteâug, They are well.
Táubot ne paump maunthéttit, I am glad they are well.
Túnna Cowâum? Whence came you?
Tuckôteshana,
Yò nowaum, I came that way.
Náwwatuck nóteshem, I came from farre.
Mattaâsu nóteshem, I came from hard by.
Wêtu, An House.
Wetuômuck nóteshem, I came from the house.
Acâwmuck nóteshem, I came over the water.
Otàn, A Towne.
Otânick nóteshem, I came from the Towne.

OBSERVATION.

In the Narigánset Countrey (which is the chief People in the Land) a man shall come to many townes, some bigger, some lesser, it may be a dozen in 20 miles travell.

In the Narigánset Country (which is the main area of the People in the Land), a man will encounter many towns, some larger and some smaller, possibly a dozen within a 20-mile journey.

OBSERVATION.

Acawmenóakit, old England, which is as much as from the Land on t’other side: hardly are they brought to believe that that water is three thousand English mile over or thereabouts.

Acawmenóakit, old England, which is basically from the Land on the other side: they can hardly believe that the water is roughly three thousand English miles across or so.

Tunnock kuttòme, Whither goe you?
Wékick nittóme, To the house.
Nékick, To my house.
Kékick,[29] To your house.
Tuckowêkin, Where dwell you?
Tuckuttîin, Where keep you?
Matnowetuómeno, I have no house.

OBSERVATION.

As commonly a single person hath no house, so after the death of a Husband or Wife, they often break up house, and live here and there a while with Friends to allay their excessive sorrowes.

As usually happens, when a person is single, they often don't have a home. After the death of a husband or wife, they frequently end up moving around and staying with friends for a while to cope with their overwhelming sadness.

Tou wuttîin? Where lives he?
Awânickuchick, Who are these?
Awaùn ewò? Who is that?
Túnna úmwock,
Tunna Wutshaûock, Whence come they?
Yo nowêkin, I dwell here.
Yo ntiîn, I live here.
Eîu or Nnîu? Is it so?
Nùx, Yea.
Matnippompitámmen, I have heard nothing.
Wésuonck, A name.
Tocketussawêitch, What is your name?
Taantússawese? Doe you aske my name.
Ntússawese, I am called, &c.
Matnowesuónckane, I have no name.

OBSERVATION.

Obscure and meane persons amongst them have no names: nullius numeri &c. as the Lord Jesus foretells his followers that their names should be cast out, Luk. 6. 22. as not worthy to be named &c. Againe, because they abhorre to name the dead (Death being the King of Terrours to all naturall men: and though the natives hold the Soule to live ever, yet not holding a Resurrection they die and mourn without Hope.) In that respect I say, if any of their Sáchims or neighbours die who were of their names, they lay down those Names as dead.

Obscure and lowly people among them have no names: nullius numeri &c. as the Lord Jesus warns his followers that their names would be cast out, Luke 6:22, as not worthy to be mentioned &c. Again, because they refuse to speak the names of the dead (since Death is the ultimate fear for all natural people: and although the locals believe the Soul lives forever, they don’t believe in Resurrection, so they die and mourn without Hope.) In that sense, I say, if any of their Sáchims or neighbors die who were of their names, they discard those Names as if they were dead.

Now ánnehick nowésuonck—I have forgot my name. Which is common amongst some of them, this being one Incivilitie amongst the more rusticall sort, not to call each other by their names, but Keen, You, Ewo, He &c.

Now ánnehick nowésuonck—I have forgotten my name. Which is common among some of them; this is one impolite behavior among the more rural folks, not to call each other by their names, but rather using terms like Keen, You, Ewo, He, etc.

[30]

[30]

Tahéna, What is his name?
Tahossowêtam, What is the name of it?
Tahéttamen, What call you this?
Teáqua, What is this?
Yò néepoush, Stay or stand here.
Máttapsh, Sit down.
Noónshem,
Non ânum, I cannot.
Tawhitch Kuppee Yaúmen, What come you for?
Téaqua Kunnaúnta men, What doe you fetch?
Chenock cuppeeyâu mis? When came you?
Maish Kitummâyi, Just even now.
Kitummâyi nippeéam, I came just now.
Yò commíttamus, Is this your wife?
Yò cuppáppoos, Is this your child?
Yò cummúckquachucks, Is this your son?
Yò cuttaûnis, Is this your daughter?
Wunnêtu, It is a fine child.
Tawhich neepou weéye an, Why stand you?
Pucqúatchick? Without dores.
Tawhítch mat pe titeáyean? Why come you not in?

OBSERV.

In this respect they are remarkably free and courteous, to invite all strangers in; and if any come to them upon any occasion, they request them to come in, if they come not in of themselves.

In this way, they are notably welcoming and polite, inviting all strangers inside; and if anyone approaches them for any reason, they ask them to come in if they don’t enter on their own.

Awássish, Warme you.
Máttapsh yóteg, Sit by the fire.
Tocketúnnawem, What say you?
Keén nétop, Is it you friend.
Peeyàush nétop, Come hither friend.
Pétitees, Come in.
Kunnúnni, Have you seene me?
Kunnúnnous, I have seen you.
Taubot mequaun namêan, I thank you for your kind
remembrance.
Taûbotneanawáyean, I thank you.
Taûbotne aunana mêan, I thank you for your love.

OBSERV.

I have acknowledged amongst them an heart sensi[31]ble of kindnesses and have reaped kindnesse again from many, seven yeares after, when I myselfe had forgotten &c. Hence the Lord Jesus exhorts his followers to doe good for evill; for otherwise sinners will do good for good, kindnesse for kindnesse. &c.

I have recognized among them a heartfelt sense of kindness and have received kindness in return from many, seven years later, when I had myself forgotten, etc. That's why the Lord Jesus encourages his followers to do good in response to evil; otherwise, sinners will just do good in return for good, kindness for kindness, etc.

Cowàmmaunsh, I love you.
Cowammaunûck, He loves you.
Cowámmaus, You are loving.
Cowáutam, Vnderstand you.
Nowaûtam, I understand.
Cowâwtam tawhitche nippeeyaûmen, Doe you know why I come.
Cowannántam, Have you forgotten?
Awanagusàntowosh, Speake English.
Eenàntowash, Speake Indian.
Cutehanshish aùmo, How many were you in company?
Kúnnishishem? Are you alone.
Nníshishem, I am alone.
Naneeshûumo, There be 2 of us.
Nanshwishâwmen, We are 4.
Npiuckshâwmen, We are 10.
Neesneechecktashaûmen, We are 20, &c.
Nquitpausucko washâwmen, We are an 100.
Comishoonhómmis, Did you come by boate?
Kuttiakewushaùmis, Came you by land?
Meshnomishoon hómmin, I came by boat.
Meshntiauké wushem, I came by land.
Nippenowàntawem, I am of another language.
Penowantowawhettûock, They are of a divers Language.
Matnowawtauhettémina, We understand not each other.
Nummaûchenèm, I am sicke.
Cummaúchenem, Are you sicke?
Tashúckunne cummauchenaûmis, How long have you been sicke?
Nummauchêmin
or I will be going.
Ntannetéimmin,
Saûop cummauchêmin, You shall goe to-morrow.
Maúchish[32]
or Be going.
Anakish,
Kuttannâwshesh, Depart.
Mauchié
or He is gone.
Annittui,
Kautanaûshant, He being gone.
Mauchéhettit
or When they are gone?
Kautanawshàwhettit,
Kukkowêtous, I will lodge with you.
Yò Cówish, Do lodge here.
Hawúnshech, Farewell.
Chénock wonck cup peeyeâumen, When will you be here againe?
Nétop tattà, My friend, I cannot tell.

From these courteous Salutations, observe in generall; here is a savour of civility and courtesie even amongst these wild Americans, both amongst themselves and towards strangers.

From these polite greetings, it’s clear; there’s a sense of civility and courtesy even among these wild Americans, both with each other and towards outsiders.

More particular:

More specific:

1. The courteous Pagan shall condemne
Uncourteous Englishmen,
Who live like Foxes, Beares and Wolves,
Or Lyon in his Den.
2. Let none sing blessings to their soules,
For that they courteous are:
The wild Barbarians with no more
Then nature, goe so farre:
3. If natures Sons both wild and tame,
Humane and courteous be:
How ill becomes it Sonnes of God
To want Humanity?

[33]

[33]

CHAP. II.

Of Eating and Entertainment.

Ascúmetesímmis? Have you not yet eaten?
Matta niccattuppúmmin, I am not hungry.
Niccàwkatone, I am thirstie.
Mannippêno? Have you no water?
Nip, or nipéwese, Give me some water.
Namitch, commetesímmin, Stay, you must eat first.
Téaquacumméich, What will you eat?
Nókehick, Parch’d meal, which is a
readie very wholesome food,

which they eate with a little water, hot or cold; I have travelled with neere 200 of them at once, neere 100 miles through the woods, every man carrying a little Basket of this at his back, and sometimes in a hollow Leather Girdle about his middle, sufficient for a man for three or four daies.

which they eat with a little water, hot or cold; I have traveled with nearly 200 of them at once, almost 100 miles through the woods, each man carrying a little basket of this on his back, and sometimes in a hollow leather belt around his waist, enough for a man for three or four days.

With this readie provision, and their Bow and Arrowes, are they ready for War, and travell at an houres warning. With a spoonfull of this meale and a spoonfull of water from the Brooke, have I made many a good dinner and supper.

With this preparation, along with their Bows and Arrows, they're ready for War and can travel on an hour’s notice. With a spoonful of this meal and a spoonful of water from the brook, I've made many good meals for lunch and dinner.

Aupúmmineanash, The parch’d corne.
Aupúminea-nawsaùmp, The parch’d meale boild
with water at their houses,
which is the wholesomest
diet they have.
Msíckquatash, Boild corne whole.
Manusqussêdash, Beanes.
Nasàump, A kind of meale pottage,
unpartch’d.

From this the English call their Samp, which is the Indian corne, beaten and boild, and eaten hot or cold with milke or butter, which are mercies beyond[34] the Natives plaine water, and which is a dish exceeding wholesome for the English bodies.

From this, the English call their Samp, which is the Indian corn, ground and boiled, and eaten hot or cold with milk or butter, which are great luxuries compared to[34] the Natives plain water, and it is a dish extremely healthy for the English bodies.

Puttuckqunnége, A Cake.
Puttuckqunnêgunash puttúckqui, Cakes or loves round.
Teâgun kuttie maûnch? What shall I dresse for you?
Assámme, Give me to eate.
Ncàttup, I am hungrie.
Wúnnancáttup, I am very hungry.
Nippaskanaûn tum, I am almost starved.
Pàutous notatàm, Give me drinke.
Sókenish, Powre forth.
Cosaúme sokenúmmis, You have powred out too much.
Wuttáttash, Drinke.
Nquitchetàmmin, Let me taste.
Quítchetash, Taste.
Saunqui nip? Is the water coole?
Saun kopaûgot, Coole water.
Chowhêsu, It is warme.
Aquie wuttàttash, Doe not drinke.
Aquie waúmatous, Doe not drinke all.
Necáwni mèich teàqua, First eat something.
Tawhitch mat me chóan, Why eat you not?
Wussaúme kusópita, It is too hot.
Teâguunnumméitch, What shall I eate?
Mateàg keesitàuano? Is there nothing ready boyld?
Ma teág mécho ewò, He eats nothing.
Cotchikésu assamme, Cut me a piece.
Cotchekúnnemi wee yoùs, Cut me some meat.
Metesíttuck, Let us goe eate.
Pautíinnea méchimucks, Bring hither some victualls.
Numwàutous, Fill the dish.
Mihtukméchakick, Tree-eaters. A people so
called (living between three

and foure hundred miles West into the land) from their eating only Mihtúchquash, that is, Trees: They are Men-eaters, they set no corne, but live on the bark of Chesnut and Walnut, and other fine trees: They dry and eat this bark with the fat of Beasts, and sometimes of men: This[35] people are the terrour of the neighbour Natives; and yet these Rebells, the Sonne of God may in time subdue.

and four hundred miles West into the land) from their diet of only Mihtúchquash, which means Trees: They are Men-eaters, they don’t grow any crops, but rely on the bark of Chestnut and Walnut, and other fine trees: They dry and consume this bark with the fat of animals, and sometimes of people: This[35] group is the terror of the neighboring Natives; and yet these Rebels, the Son of God may eventually conquer.

Mauchepweéan, After I have eaten.
Maúchepwucks, After meales.
Maúchepwut, When he hath eaten.
Paúshaqua múchepwut, After dinner.
Wàyyeyant maúchepwut, After supper.
Nquittmaûntash, Smell.
Weetimóquat, It smells sweet.
Machemóqut, It stinks.
Weékan, It is sweet.
Machíppoquat, It is sowre.
Aúwusse weékan, It is sweeter.
Askùn, It is raw.
Noónat, Not enough.
Wusàume wékissu, Too much either boyled or rosted.
Waûmet Taûbi, It is enough.
Wuttattumútta, Let us drinke.
Neesneecháhettit taúbi, Eenough for twentie men.
Mattacuckquàw, A Cooke.
Mattacúcquass, Cooke or dresse.
Matcuttassamíin? Will you not give me to eate?
Keen méitch, I pray eate.

They generally all take Tobacco; and it is commonly the only plant which men labour in; the women managing all the rest: they say they take Tobacco for two causes; first, against the rheume, which cavseth the toothake, which they are impatient of: secondly, to revive and refresh them, they drinking nothing but water.

They all usually grow Tobacco, and it’s typically the only crop that men work on; the women handle everything else. They say they grow Tobacco for two reasons: first, to help with the cold that causes toothaches, which they can’t stand; and second, to refresh and revive themselves since they drink nothing but water.

Squuttame, Give me your pipe.
Petasínna, or, Wuttammasin, Give me some Tobacco.
Ncattaûntum, or, Ncattiteam, I long for that.
Màuchinaash nowépiteass, My teeth are naught.
Nummashackquneaûmen, Wee are in a dearth.
Mashackquineâug,[36] We have no food.
Aúcuck, A Kettle.
Míshquockuk, A red Copper Kettle.
Nètop kuttássammish, Friend, I have brought you this.
Quàmphash quamp homíinea, Take up for me out of the pot.
Eíppoquat, It is sweet.
Teàqua aspùckquat? What doth it taste of?
Nowètipo, I like this.
Wenómeneash, Grapes or Rapsins.
Waweècocks, Figs, or some strange sweet meat.
Nemaùanash, Provisions for the way.
Nemauanínnuit, A Snapsacke.
Tackhùmmin, To grind Corne.
Tackhumíinnea, Beat me parch’d meale.
Pishquèhick, Unparch’d meale.
Nummaùchip nup mauchepùmmin, We have eaten all.
Cowàump? Have you enough?
Nowâump, I have enough.
Mohowaùgsuck, or Mauquàuog, from móho to eate, The Canibals, or Men eaters, up in to the West two, three or foure hundred miles from us.
Cummóhucquock, They will eate you.

Whomsoever commeth in when they are eating, they offer them to eat of that which they have, though but little enough prepar’d for themselves. If any provision of fish or flesh come in, they make their neighbours partakers with them.

Whoever comes in while they're eating, they offer them some of what they have, even if it's just a small amount prepared for themselves. If any food like fish or meat comes in, they share it with their neighbors.

If any stranger come in, they presently give him to eate of what they have; many a time, and at all times of the night (as I have fallen in travell upon their houses) when nothing hath been ready, have themselves and their wives, risen to prepare me some refreshing.

If any stranger comes in, they immediately offer him food from what they have; many times, even at all hours of the night (as I have happened upon their homes) when nothing has been prepared, they and their wives have gotten up to make me something refreshing.

The observation generall from their eating &c.

It is a strange truth, that a man shall generally finde more free entertainment and refreshing amongst[37] these Barbarians, then amongst thousands that call themselves Christians.

It is a strange truth that a man will generally find more free entertainment and refreshment among[37] these Barbarians than among thousands who call themselves Christians.

More particular:

More specific:

1. Course bread and water’s most their fare,
O Englands diet fine;
Thy cup runs ore with plenteous store
Of wholesome beare and Wine.
2. Sometimes God gives them Fish or Flesh,
Yet they’re content without;
And what comes in they part to friends
And strangers round about.
3. God’s providence is rich to his,
Let none distrustfull be;
In wildernesse, in great distresse,
These Ravens have fed me.

[38]

[38]

CHAP. III.

Concerning Sleepe and Lodging.

Nsowwushkâwmen, I am weary.
Nkàtaquaum, I am sleepie.
Kukkovetoùs, Shall I lodge here?
Yo nickowémen? Shall I sleepe here?
Kukkowéti, Will you sleepe here.
Wunnégin, cówish, Welcome, sleepe here.
Nummouaquômen, I will lodge abroad.
Puckquátchick nickouêmen, I will sleepe without the doores,
Which I have knowne them

contentedly doe, by a fire under a tree, when sometimes some English have (for want of familiaritie and language, with them) been fearefull to entertaine them. In Summer-time I have knowne them lye abroad often themselves, to make roome for Strangers, English, or others.

contentedly doe, by a fire under a tree, when sometimes some English have (for lack of familiarity and language, with them) been scared to engage with them. In the summer, I have seen them often lie outside themselves to make room for strangers, English, or others.

Mouaquómitea, Let us lye abroad.
Cowwêtuck, Let us Sleepe.
Kukkóuene? Sleepe you?
Cowwêke, Sleepe, sleepe.
Cowwêwi, He is asleepe.
Cowwêwock, They sleepe.
Askukkówene? Sleepe you yet?
Takitíppocat, It is a cold night.
Wekitíppocat, It is a warme night.
Wauwháutaw ánawat, and There is an alarme, or,
Wawhautowâvog, there is a great shouting:

Howling and shouting is their Alarme; they having no Drums nor Trumpets: but whether an enemie approach, or fire breake out, this Alarme passeth from house to house; yea, commonly, if any English or Dutch come amongst them, they give notice of Strangers[39] by this signe; yet I have knowne them buy and use a Dutch Trumpet, and knowne a Native make a good Drum in imitation of the English.

Howling and shouting is their alarm; they don’t have drums or trumpets. But whether an enemy is approaching or a fire breaks out, this alarm goes from house to house. In fact, usually, if any English or Dutch people come among them, they alert others about strangers with this signal. Still, I’ve seen them buy and use a Dutch trumpet, and I’ve known a native to make a good drum imitating the English. [39]

Mattannauke, or A fine sorte of mats to Sleep on.
Mattannoukanash,
Maskítuash, Straw to ly on.
Wuddtúckqunash, ponamáuta, Let us lay on wood.

This they doe plentifully when they lie down to sleep winter and summer, abundance they have and abundance they lay on: their Fire is instead of our bedcloaths. And so, themselves and any that have occasion to lodge with them, must be content to turne often to the fire if the night be cold, and they who first wake must repaire the Fire.

This they do plenty when they lie down to sleep in winter and summer; they have enough and more than enough: their fire serves as our blankets. So, both they and anyone who needs to stay with them must be okay with getting up regularly to tend to the fire if the night is cold, and those who wake up first must tend to the fire.

Mauataúnamoke, Mend the fire.
Mauataunamútta, Let us mend the fire.
Tokêtuck, Let us wake.
Askuttokémis, Are you not awake yet.
Tókish, Tókeke, Wake wake.
Tókinish, Wake him.
Kitumyái tokéan, As soone as I wake.
Ntunnaquômen, I have had a good dream.
Nummattaquômen, I have had a bad dream.

When they have had a bad Dreame, which they conceive to be a threatening from God, they fall to prayer at all times of the night, especially early before day: So David’s zealous heart to the true and living God: At midnight will I rise &c. I prevented the dawning of the day, &c. Psal. 119, &c.

When they have a bad dream that they think is a warning from God, they pray at all hours of the night, especially early in the morning before dawn. This reflects David's passionate devotion to the true and living God: At midnight I will rise & etc. I prevented the dawning of the day, & etc. Psal. 119, & etc.

Wunnakukkússaquaùm, You sleep much.
Peeyauntam, He prayes.
Peeyâuntamwock, They pray.
Túnna kukkowémis, Where slept you?
Awaun wéick kukkouĕmis, At whose house did you sleep?

I once travailed to an Iland of the wildest in our parts, where in the night an Indian (as he said) had a vision or dream of the Sun (whom they worship for a God) darting a Beame into his Breast which he conceived to be the Messenger of his Death: This poore Native call’d his Friends and neighbours, and[40] prepared some little refreshing for them, but himselfe was kept waking and Fasting in great Humiliations and Invocations for 10 dayes and nights: I was alone (having travailed from my Barke, the wind being contrary) and little could I speake to them to their understandings especially because of the change of their Dialect or manner of Speech from our neighbours: yet so much (through the help of God) I did speake, of the True and living only Wise God, of the Creation: of Man, and his fall from God, &c. that at parting many burst forth, Oh when will you come againe, to bring us some more newes of this God?

I once traveled to one of the wildest islands in our area, where one night an Indian (as he claimed) had a vision or dream of the Sun (whom they worship as a God) sending a beam into his chest, which he believed was a message of his death. This poor native called his friends and neighbors and prepared some refreshments for them, but he himself stayed awake and fasted in great humility and prayer for ten days and nights. I was alone (having traveled from my boat with the wind against me) and I could hardly communicate with them, especially because their way of speaking was so different from our neighbors'. Yet, thanks to God’s help, I spoke as much as I could about the True and living only Wise God, about creation, about man, and his fall from God, etc., that upon leaving, many exclaimed, Oh when will you come again to bring us more news of this God?

From their Sleeping: The Observation generall.

Sweet rest is not confind to soft Beds, for, not only God gives his beloved sleep on hard lodgings: but also Nature and Custome gives sound sleep to these Americans on the Earth, on a Boord or Mat. Yet how is Europe bound to God for better lodging, &c.

Sweet rest isn't limited to soft beds, because not only does God grant His beloved sleep in hard places, but nature and habit also provide sound sleep for these Americans on the ground, on a board, or mat. Yet how is Europe obligated to God for better accommodations, etc.

More particular:

More specific:

1. God gives them sleep on Ground, on Straw,
on Sedgie Mats or Boord:
When English Softest Beds of Downe,
sometimes no sleep affoord.
2. I have knowne them leave their House and Mat,
to lodge a Friend or stranger,
When Jewes and Christians oft have sent
Christ Jesus to the Manger.
3. ’Fore day they invocate their Gods,
Though Many False and New:
O how should that God worshipt be,
who is but One and True?

[41]

[41]

CHAP. IV.

Of their Names.

Nquít,         One.
Neèsse,           2
Nísh,           3
Yòh,           4
Napànna,           5
Qútta,           6
Enada,           7
Shwósuck,           8
Paskúgit,           9
Piùck,         10
Piucknabna quìt,         11
Piucknab neèse,         12
Piucknab nìsh,         13
Piucknab yòh,         14
Piucknab napánna,         15
Piucknab naqútta,         16
Piucknab énada,         17
Piucknabna shwósuck,         18
Piucknab napaskúgit,         19
Neesnééchick,         20
Neesneéchicknabnaquít, &c.         21, &c.
Shwínckeck,         30
Swìncheck nabnaquít, &c.         31, &c.
Yowínicheck,         40
Yowinicheck nabnaquìt, &c.         41, &c.
Napannetashincheck,         50
Napannetashincheknabnaquìt,         51, &c.
Quttatashìncheck,         60
Quttatashincheck nabnaquìt,         61, &c.
Enadatashíncheck,         70
Enadatashincheck nabnaquít,[42]         71, &c.
Swoasuck ta shincheck,         80
Swoasuck tashincheck nabna qnít,         81, &c.
Paskugit tashìncheck, &c.         90
Paskugit tashincheck nabnaquìt &c.         91 &c.
Nquìt pâwsuck,       100
Nees pâwsuck,       200
Shweepâwsuck,       300
Yowe pâwsuck,       400
Napannetashe pâwsuck,       500
Quttatashe pâwsuck,       600
Enadatashe pâwsuck,       700
Shoasuchtashe pâwsuck,       800
Paskugit tashepâwsuck,       900
Nquittemittànnug,     1000
Neese mittànnug,     2000
Nishwe mittànnnug,     3000
Yowe mittànnug,     4000
Napannetashemittànnug,     5000
Quttátashe mittánnug,     6000
Enadatashe mittànnug,     7000
Shoasuck ta she mittànnug,     8000
Paskugittashe mittánnug,     9000
Piuckque mittànnug,   10000
Neesneecheck tashe mittànnug,   20000
Shwinchecktashe mittánnug,   30000
Yowincheck tashemittánnug,   40000
Napannetashincheck tashe mittánnug,   50000
Quttatashincheck tashemittánnug,   60000
Enadatashincheck tashemittánnuck,   70000
Shoashuck tashincheck tashe mittánug,   80000
Pàskugit tashincheck tashe mittànnug,   90000
Nquit pausuckéemittànnug &c. 100000

Having no Letters nor Arts, ’tis admirable how quick they are in casting up great numbers, with the helpe of graines of Corne, instead of Europes pens or counters.

Having no letters or arts, it's impressive how quickly they can calculate large numbers using grains of corn instead of European pens or counters.

[43]

[43]

Numbers of the Masculine Gender.

Pâwsuck, 1.
Neéswock, 2. Sketomp a Man.
Shùog, 3.
Yówock, 4.       { Skeetom
Napannetasúog, 5. as, { Paúog.
Quttasúog, 6.       { Men.
Enadátasúog, 7.
Shoasuck tasúog, 8.
Paskugit tasúog, 9.
Piucksúog, 10.
Piucksúog nabnaquít, 11.

Of the Feminine Gender.

Pâwsuck, 1.
Neénash, 2.
Swínash, 3.
Yowúnnash, 4.       { Wauchò.
Napannetashínash, 5. as, { Hill.
Quttatashínash, 6.       { Wauchóash.
Enadtashínash, 7.       { Hills.
Shoasucktashínash, 8.
Paskugittashínash, 9.
Píuckquatash, 10.
Puíckquatash nabnaquìt, 11.

From their Numbers, Observation Generall.

Let it be considered, whether Tradition of ancient Forefathers, or Nature hath taught them Europes Arithmaticke.

Let it be considered whether the traditions of our ancient Forefathers or Nature have taught them Europe's Arithmetick.

More particular:

More specific:

1. Their Braines are quick, their hands,
Their feet, their tongues, their eyes:
God may fit objects in his time,
To those quicke faculties.
2. Objects of higher nature make them tell,
The holy number of his Sons Gospel:
Make them and us to tell what told may be;
But stand amazed at Eternitie.

[44]

[44]

CHAP. V.

Of their relations of consanguinitie and affinitie, or,
Blood and Marriage.

Nnìn-nnìnnuog &
Skeétomp-aûog, Man-men.
Squàws-suck, Woman-women.
Kichize, & An old man,
Kichizuck, Old men.
Hômes, & An Old man,
Hômesuck, Old men.
Kutchínnu, A middle-aged man,
Kutchínnuwock, Middle-aged men.
Wuskeène, A youth,
Wuskeeneésuck, Youths.
Wénise, & An old woman,
Wenîsuck, Old women.
Mattaûntum, Very old and decrepit.
Wâsick, An Husband.
Weéwo, &
Mittúmmus, & A Wife.
Wullógana,
Noweéwo, My Wife.
Nummíttamus, &c.
Osh, A Father.
Nósh, My father.
Cŏsh, Your father.
Cuttóso? Have you a father?
Okásu, & A mother.
Witchwhaw
Nókace, níchwhaw, My mother.
Wússese, An Unckle.
Nissesê, My Unckle.
Papoòs, A childe.
Nippápoos, & My childe.
Nummúckiese,[45]
Nummuckquâchucks, My sonne.
Nittaûnis, My daughter.
Non ânese, A sucking child.
Muckquachuckquêmese, A little boy.
Squasese, A little girle.
Weémat, A brother.

They hold the band of brother-hood so deare, that when one had committed a murther and fled, they executed his brother; and ’tis common for a brother to pay the debt of a brother deceased.

They value their brotherhood so highly that when one of them commits murder and runs away, they execute his brother instead; and it’s common for a brother to repay the debts of a deceased sibling.

Neémat, My brother.
Wéticks, & A sister.
Weésummis,
Wematíttuock, They are brothers.
Cutchashematitín? How many brothers have you?
Natóncks, My cousin.
Kattòncks, Your cousin.
Watòncks, A cousin.
Nullóquasso, My ward or pupill.
Wattonksíttuock, They are cousins.
Kíhtuckquaw, A virgin marriageable.

Their Virgins are distinguished by a bashful falling downe of their haire over their eyes.

Their Virgins are distinguished by a shy cascade of hair falling over their eyes.

Towiùwock, Fatherlesse children.

There are no beggars amongst them, nor fatherlesse children unprovided for.

There are no beggars among them, nor fatherless children left without care.

Tackqíuwock, Twins.

Their affections, especially to their children, are very strong; so that I have knowne a Father take so grievously the losse of his childe, that he hath cut and stob’d himselfe with griefe and rage.

Their affections, especially towards their children, are very strong; so much so that I have known a father to take the loss of his child so badly that he has hurt himself out of grief and rage.

This extreme affection, together with want of learning, makes their children sawcie, bold and undutifull.

This intense affection, along with a lack of learning, makes their children sassy, bold, and disrespectful.

I once came into a house and requested some water to drinke; the father bid his sonne (of some 8 yeeres of age) to fetch some water: the boy refused, and would not stir; I told the father that I would correct my child, if he should so disobey me, &c. Upon this the father took up a sticke, the boy another, and flew at his father: upon my perswasion, the poor father made him smart[46] a little, threw downe his stick, and run for water and the father confessed the benefit of correction, and the evil of their too indulgent affections.

I once went into a house and asked for some water to drink; the father told his son (who was about 8 years old) to get some water: the boy refused and wouldn’t move. I told the father that I would discipline my child if he disobeyed me like that, etc. Hearing this, the father picked up a stick, the boy grabbed another, and they started fighting. With my encouragement, the poor father made him feel the consequences a little, dropped his stick, and went to get water, and the father admitted the value of discipline and the downsides of their overly indulgent affections.

From their Relations.—Observation generall.

In the minds of depraved mankinde, are yet to be founde Natures distinctions, and Natures affections.

In the minds of corrupt humanity, you can still find Natures distinctions and Natures affections.

More particular:

More specific:

The Pagans wild confesse the bonds
Of married chastitie:
How vild are Nicolâitans that hold
Of Wives communitie?
How kindly flames of nature burne
In wild humanitie?
Naturall affections who wants, is sure
Far from Christianity.
Best nature’s vaine, he’s blest that’s made
A new and rich partaker
Of divine Nature of his God,
And blest eternall Maker.

[47]

[47]

CHAP. VI.

Of the Family and Businesse of the House.

Wetu, An House.
Wetuômuck, At home.
Nékick, My house.
Kékick, Your house.
Wékick, At his house.
Nickquénum, I am going;

Which is a solemne word amongst them; and no man will offer any hinderance to him, who after some absence is going to visit his Family, and useth this word Nicquénum, (confessing the sweetness even of these short temporall homes.)

Which is a serious word among them; and no one will stand in the way of someone who, after being away for a while, is going to visit their family and uses this word Nicquénum, (acknowledging the sweetness even of these brief temporary homes.)

Puttuckakàun, A round house.
Puttuckakàunese, A little round house.
Wetuomémese, A little house;

which their women and maids live apart in, foure, five, or six dayes, in the time of their monethly sicknesse, which custome in all parts of the Countrey they strictly observe, and no Male may come into that house.

which their women and maids live separately in for four, five, or six days during their monthly period, a custom they strictly follow throughout the entire country, and no Male is allowed to enter that house.

Neés quttow, A long house with two fires.
Shwíshcuttow, With three fires.
Abockquósiuash, The mats of the house.
Wuttapuíssuck, The long poles,
which commonly men get and

fix, and then the women cover the house with mats, and line them with embroydered mats which the women make, and call them Mannotaúbana, or Hangings, which amongst them make as faire a show as Hangings with us.

fix, and then the women cover the house with mats and line them with embroidered mats that the women create, and they call them Mannotaúbana, or Hangings, which among them look just as nice as hangings do for us.

Nòte, or Yòte,
Chíckot, & Fire.
Sqútta
Notáwese & chickautáwese,[48] A little fire.
Púck, Smoke.
Puckíssu, Smokie.
Nippúckis, Smoke troubleth me.
Wuchickapêuck, Burching barke. And
chesnut barke which they

dresse finely, and make a Summer-covering for their houses.

dressed nicely, and create a summer covering for their homes.

Cuppoquiíttemin, I will divide house with you, or dwell with you.

Two Families will live comfortably and lovingly in a little round house of some fourteen or sixteen foot over, and so more and more families in proportion.

Two families will live comfortably and happily in a small round house that's about fourteen or sixteen feet across, and more families can fit in proportion.

Núckqusquatch, I am cold.
Núckqusquatchímin,
Potouwássiteuck, Let us make a fire.
Wúdtuckqun, A piece of wood.
Wudtúckquanash Lay on wood.
Ponamâuta,
Pawacómwushesh, Cut some wood.
Maumashinnaunamaûta, Let us make a good fire.
Npaacómwushem, I will cut wood.
Aséneshesh, Fetch some small sticks.
Wònck, & More.
Wònkatack,
Wonckataganash nàus, Fetch some more.
Netashin & Newuchásinea, There is no more.
Wequanántash, A light fire.
Wequanantig, A Candle, or Light.
Wequanantiganash, Candles.
Wékinan, A light fire.
Awâuo? Who is at home?
Mat Awawanúnno, There is no body.
Unháppo Kòsh, Is your father at home?
Túckiu Sáchim, Where is the Sachim?
Mat-apeù, He is not at home.
Peyáu, He is come.
Weche-peyàu hee mat, Your brother is come with him.
Pótawash, Make a fire.
Potâuntash, Blowe the fire.
Peeyâuog,[49] They are come.
Wâme, paúshe, All-some.
Tawhìtch mat peyá yean, Why came, or, come you not.
Mesh noónshem peeyaùn, I could not come.
Mocenanippeéam, I will come by and by.
Aspeyàu, asquam, He is not come yet.
Yò aútant mesh nippeéam, I was here the sunne so high.

And then they point with the hand to the Sunne, by whose highth they keepe account of the day, and by the Moone and Stars by night, as wee doe by clocks and dialls, &c.

And then they point with their hand to the Sun, by whose height they keep track of the day, and by the Moon and Stars at night, just like we do with clocks and sundials, etc.

Wùskont peyâuog, They will come.
Teaqua naúntick ewò, What comes hee for?
Yo áppitch ewò, Let him sit there.
Unhappo kòsh, Is your father at home.
Unnàugh, He is there.
Npépeyup náwwot, I have long been here.
Tawhitch peyáuyean, Why doe you come?
Téaguun kunnaúntamun? What come you for?
Awàun ewò? Who is that?
Nowéchiume, He is my servant.
Wécum, nàus, Call, fetch.
Petiteaûta, Let us goe in.
Noonapummin autashehéttit, There is not roome for so many.
Taubapímmin, Roome enough.
Noónat, Not enough.
Asquam, Not yet.
Náim, nàmitch, By and by.
Moce, unuckquaquêse, Instantly.
Máish, kittummây, Just, even now.
Túckiu, tíyu, Where.
Kukkekuttokâwmen, Would you speake with him?
Nùx, Yea.
Wuttammâun tam, He is busie.
Nétop notammâuntam, Friend, I am busie.
Cotámmâuntam, Are you busie?
Cotámmish, I hinder you.
Cotammmúme, Cotamme, You trouble me.

[50]

[50]

Obs: They are as full of businesse, and as impatient of hinderance (in their kind) as any Merchant in Europe.

Obs: They are just as busy and as impatient with interruptions (in their way) as any merchant in Europe.

Nqussûtam, I am removing.
Notámmehick ewò, He hinders me.
Maumacníuash, Goods.
Aúqiegs, Householdstuffe.
Tuckìiuash, Where be they?
Wenawwêtu, Rich.
Machêtu, Poore.
Wenawetuónckon, Wealth.
Kúppash, Shut the doore.
Kuphómmin, To shut the doore.
Yeaùsh, Shut doore after you.

Obs: Commonly they never shut their doores, day nor night; and ’tis rare that any hurt is done.

Obs: They usually never close their doors, day or night; and it’s rare for any harm to occur.

Wunêgin, Well, or good.
Machit, Naught, or evill.
Cowaûtam? Do you understand?
Machâug, No, or not.
Wunuàug, A Tray.
Wunnaugánash, Trayes.
Kunàm, A Spoone.
Kunnamâuog, Spoones.

Obs: Insteed of shelves, they have severall baskets, wherein they put all their householdstuffe; they have some great bags or sacks made of Hempe which will hold five or sixe bushells.

Obs: Instead of shelves, they have several baskets, where they put all their household stuff; they have some large bags or sacks made of hemp that can hold five or six bushels.

Tácunck, or Wéskunck, Their pounding Morter.

Obs: Their Women constantly beat all their corne with hand: they plant it, dresse it, gather it, barne it, beat it, and take as much paines as any people in the world, which labour is questionlesse one cause of their extraordinary ease of child birth.

Obs: Their women constantly beat all their grain by hand: they plant it, tend to it, harvest it, thresh it, and put in as much effort as anyone in the world, and this hard work is undoubtedly one reason for their remarkable ease of childbirth.

Wunnauganémese, A little Tray.
Téaqua cunnàtinne, What doe you looke for?
Natínnehas, Search.
Kekíneas, See here.
Machage cunna miteôuwin? Doe you find nothing.
Wónckatack, Another.
Tunnatì, Where.
Ntauhaunanatinnehómmin,[51] I cannot looke or search.
Ntauhaunanamiteoúwin, I cannot find.
Wíaseck, Eiassunck,
Mocôtick, Punnêtunck, A Knife.
Chauqock,

Obs: Whence they call Englishmen Cháuquaquock, that is, Knive-men, stone formerly being to them instead of Knives, Awle blades, Hatchets and Howes.

Obs: This is why they call Englishmen Cháuquaquock, which means Knive-men, since stones used to serve them instead of Knives, Awle blades, Hatchets and Howes.

Namacówhe, Lend me your Knife.
Cówíaseck,
Wonck Commêsim? Wil you give it me again?
Mátta nowáuwone, I knew nothing.
Matta nowáhea,
Mat meshnowáhea, I was innocent.
Paútous, Pautâuog, Bring hither.
Maúchatous, Carry this.
Niâutàsh, &
Wéawhush, Take it on your backe.

Obs: It is almost incredible what burthens the poore women carry of Corne, of fish, of Beanes, of Mats, and a childe besides.

Obs: It's almost unbelievable what burdens the poor women carry—corn, fish, beans, mats, and a child on top of that.

Awâùn, There is some body.
Kekíneas, Goe and see.
Squauntâumuck, At the doore.
Awàun keèn? Who are you?
Keèn nétop, Is it you?
Pauquanamíinnea, Open me the doore.

Obs: Most commonly there houses are open, their doore is a hanging Mat, which being lift up, falls downe of itselfe; yet many of them get English boards and nailes, and make artificiall doores and bolts themselves, and others make slighter doores of Burch or Chesnut barke, which they make fast with a cord in the night time, or when they go out of town, and then the last (that makes fast) goes out at the Chimney, which is a large opening in the middle of their house, called:

Obs: Most of the time, their houses are open, and their door has a hanging mat that lifts up and falls down on its own. Still, many of them buy English boards and nails to create artificial doors and bolts themselves. Others make lighter doors from birch or chestnut bark, which they secure with a cord at night or when they leave town. The last person who secures it exits through the chimney, a large opening in the center of their house, called:

Wunnauchicómock, A chimney.
Anúnema, Helpe me.
Neenkuttánnúmous, I will helpe you.
Kuttánnummi? Will you helpe me?
Shookekíneas, Behold here.
Assótu and Assóko,[52] A foole.
Nummouekékineam, I come to see.
Tou autég, Know you where it lies?
Tou núckquaque, How much.
Yo naumwâuteg, Thus full.
Aqúíe, Leave off, or doe not.
Waskéche, On the top.
Náumtuck, In the bottome.
Aŭqunnish, Let goe.
Aukeeaseíu, Downewards.
Keesuckqíu, Upwards.
Aumàunsh,        }
Ausàuonsh,        } Take away.
Aumáunamòke, }
Nanóuwetea, A Nurse, or Keeper.
Naunóuwheant,
Nanowwúnemum, I looke to, or Keepe.

Obs: They nurse all their children themselves; yet, if she be an high or rich woman, she maintaines a Nurse to tend the childe.

Obs: They take care of all their children themselves; however, if she is a high-status or wealthy woman, she hires a nurse to look after the child.

Waucháunama, Keep this for me.
Cuttatashíinnas, Lay these up for me.

Obs: Many of them begin to be furnished with English chests; others, when they goe forth of towne, bring their goods (if they live neere) to the English to keepe for them, and their money they hang it about their necks, or lay it under their head when they sleepe.

Obs: Many of them start to have English chests; others, when they go out of town, bring their belongings (if they live nearby) to the English to keep for them, and they hang their money around their necks or put it under their heads when they sleep.

Peewâuqun, Have a care.
Nnowauchâunum, I will have a care.
Kuttaskwhè, Stay for me.
Kúttasha,
and Have you this or that?
Cowauchâunum,
Pókesha
and It is broke.
Pokeshawwa,
Mat Coanichégane, Have you no hands?
Tawhìtch? Why aske you?
Nóonshem Pawtuckquámmin, I cannot reach.
Aquie Pokesháttous, Doe not breake.
Pokesháttouwin, To breake.

[53]

[53]

OBSERVATION.

Observation.

They have also amongst them naturall fooles, either so borne, or accidentally deprived of reason.

They also have among them natural fools, either born that way or accidentally deprived of reason.

Aquie assókish, Be not foolish.
Awanick, Some come.
Niáutamwock, They are loden.
Pauchewannâuog,
Mattapeu and A woman keeping alone in
Qushenáwsui, her monethly sicknesse.
Moce ntúnnan, I will tell him by and by.
Cowequetúmmous, I pray or intreat you.
Wunniteôuin, To mend any thing.
Wúnniteous, or Mend this.
Wússiteous, Mend this.
Wúskont nochemuckqun, I shall be chidden.
Nickúmmat, Easie.
Siúckat, Hard.
Cummequâwname? Do you remember me?
Mequaunamíinnea, Remember me.
Puckqúatchick, Without doores.
Nissawhócunckewò, He puts me out of doores.
Kussawhóki? Doe you put mee out of doores?
Kussawhocowóog, Put them forth.
Tawhítch kussawhokiêan? Why doe you put mee out?
Sáwwhush, Goe forth.
Sawhèke,
Wussauhemútta, Let us goe forth.
Matta nickquéhick, I want it not.
Machagè nickquehickômina, I want nothing.

OBSERVATION.

Observation.

Many of them naturally Princes, or else industrious persons, are rich; and the poore amongst them will say, they want nothing.

Many of them, whether naturally princes or hardworking individuals, are wealthy; and the poor among them will say they lack nothing.

Páwsawash, Drie or ayre this.
Pawsunnúmmin, To drie this or that.
Cuppausummúnnash, Drie these things.
Apíssumma, Warme this for me.
Paucótche, Already.
Cutsshitteoùs, Wash this.
Tatágganish,[54] Shake this.
Naponsh, Lay downe.
Wuchè machaùg, About nothing.
Puppucksháckhege, A Box.
Paupaqúonteg, A Key.
Mowáshuck, Iron.
Wâuki, Crooked.
Saûmpi, Strait.
Aumpaniímmin, To undoe a knot.
Aúmpanish, Vntie this.
Paushinúmmin, To divide into two.
Pepênash, Take your choyce.
Nawwuttùnsh Throw hither.
Pawtáwtees,
Negáutowash, Send for him.
Negauchhúwash, Send this to him.
Negáuchemish, Hee sends to mee.
Nowwêta, No matter.
Mâuo, To cry and bewaile.

Which bewailing is very solemne amongst them morning and evening, and sometimes in the Night they bewaile their lost husbands, wives, children, brethren, or sisters &c. Sometimes a quarter, halfe, yea, a whole yeare, and longer if it be for a great Prince. In this time (unlesse a dispensation be given) they count it a prophane thing either to play (as they much use to doe) or to paint themselves for beauty, but for mourning; or to be angry and fall out with any &c.

Which mourning is very solemn among them morning and evening, and sometimes at night they grieve for their lost husbands, wives, children, brothers, or sisters, etc. Sometimes they do this for a quarter, half, or even a whole year, and longer if it is for a great prince. During this time (unless a dispensation is granted), they consider it disrespectful to either play (as they usually do) or to beautify themselves with makeup, except for mourning; or to be angry and argue with anyone, etc.

Machemóqut, It stincks.
Machemóqussu, A vile or stinking person.
Wúnnickshaas, Mingled.
Wúnnickshan, To mingle.
Nésick, & nashóqua, A Combe.
Tetúpsha, To fall downe.
Ntetúpshem, I fall downe.
Tou anúckquaque? How big?
Wunnáshpishan, To snatch away.
Tawhìtch wunnashpisháyean, Why snatch you.
Wuttùsh, Hitherward, and give me.
Enèick, or áwwusse, Further.
Nneickomásu, and awwassése,[55] A little further.
Wuttushenaquáish, Looke hither.
Yo anaquáyean, Looke about.
Máuks, maugoke, Give this.
Yo comméish, I will give you this.
Qussúcqun-náukon, Heavie, light.
Kuckqússaqun, You are heavie.
Kunnaùki, You are light.
Nickáttash, singular, Leave, or depart.
Nickáttammoke, plur.
Nickattamútta, Let us depart.
Yòwa, Thus.
Ntowwaukâumen, I use it.
Awawkáwnì, It is used.
Yo awáutees, Vse this.
Yo wéque, Thus farre.
Yo mèshnowékeshem, I went thus farre.
Ayatche, and As Often.
Cónkitchea,
Ayatche nippéeam, I am often here.
Pakêtash, Fling it away.
Npaketamúnnash, I will cast him away.
Wuttammásim, Give me Tobacco.
Matnowewuttámmo, I take none.

Obs: Which some doe not, but they are rare Birds; for generally all the Men throughout the Countrey have a Tobacco-bag with a pipe in it, hanging at their back; sometimes they make such great pipes, both of wood and stone, that they are two foot long, with men or beasts carved, so big or massie, that a Man may be hurt mortally by one of them; but these commonly come from the Mauquáuwogs, or the men eaters, three or foure hundred miles from us: They have an excellent Art to cast our Pewter and Brasse into very neate and artificiall Pipes: They take their Wuttamâuog (that is, a weake Tobacco) which the Men plant themselves, very frequently; yet I never see any take so excessively, as I have seene Men in Europe; and yet excesse were more tolerable in them, because they want the refreshing of Beare and Wine, which God hath vouchafed Europe.

Obs: Some people don’t, but they are rare; generally, all the men throughout the country have a tobacco bag with a pipe in it, hanging at their back. Sometimes they make such large pipes, both from wood and stone, that they are two feet long, with carvings of men or beasts that are so big and heavy that a person could be seriously injured by one of them; but these usually come from the Mauquáuwogs, or the flesh-eaters, three or four hundred miles away from us. They have an excellent skill in casting our pewter and brass into very neat and artistic pipes. They frequently use their Wuttamâuog (which is weak tobacco) that the men plant themselves; however, I have never seen anyone use it as excessively as I have seen men in Europe. Yet, excess would be more acceptable in them because they don’t have the refreshing drink of beer and wine that God has granted to Europe.

[56]

[56]

Wuttámmagon, A Pipe.
Hopuónck, A Pipe.

Chicks, a cocke, or hen: A name taken from the English chicke, because they have no hens before the English came.

Chicks, a rooster, or hen: A name derived from the English "chick," because there were no hens before the English arrived.

Chícks ánawat, The Cocke crowes.
Neesquttónckqussu, A babler, or prater.
Cunneesquttonck quessimmin, You prate.

Obs: Which they figuratively transferre from the frequent troublesome clamour of a Cocke.

Obs: Which they figuratively transfer from the frequent annoying noise of a rooster.

Nanótateem, I keepe house alone.
Aquìe kuttúnnan, Doe not tell.
Aquìe mooshkisháttous, Doe not disclose.
Teàg yo augwháttick? What hangs there?
Yo augwháttous? Hang it there.
Pemisquâi, Crooked, or winding.
Penâyi, Crooked.

Nqussútam—I remove house: Which they doe upon these occasions: From thick warme vallies, where they winter, they remove a little neerer to their Summer fields; when ’tis warme Spring, then they remove to their fields, where they plant Corne. In middle of Summer, because of the abundance of Fleas, which the dust of the house breeds, they will flie and remove on a sudden from one part of their field to a fresh place: And sometimes having fields a mile or two, or many miles asunder, when the worke of one field is over, they remove house to the other: If death fall in amongst them, they presently remove to a fresh place: If an enemie approach they remove into a Thicket, or Swampe, unlesse they have some fort to remove unto.

Nqussútam—I move my home: This is what they do on these occasions. From the warm, thick valleys where they spend the winter, they move a little closer to their summer fields. When spring comes and the weather warms up, they head to their fields to plant corn. In the middle of summer, because of the many fleas that the dust from the house attracts, they suddenly leave one part of their field for a new spot. Sometimes with fields a mile or two apart, or even many miles away, when they finish working on one field, they move their home to the other. If there's a death among them, they quickly move to a new location. If an enemy approaches, they retreat into a thicket or swamp unless they have a fort to move to.

Sometimes they remove to a hunting house in the end of the yeare, and forsake it not until Snow lie thick and then will travell home, Men, women and children, thorow the snow, thirtie, yea, fiftie or sixtie miles; but their great remove is from their Summer fields to warme and thicke woodie bottomes where they winter: They are quicke; in halfe a day, yea, sometimes at few houres warning to be gone and the[57] house up elsewhere, especially, if they have stakes readie pitcht for their Mats.

Sometimes they move to a hunting lodge at the end of the year and don’t leave until the snow is deep. Then they travel home, men, women, and children, through the snow, thirty, even fifty or sixty miles. But their main move is from their summer fields to warm and dense wooded areas where they spend the winter. They’re quick; in half a day, or sometimes with just a few hours' notice, they can be gone and set up their house somewhere else, especially if they have stakes ready to pitch for their mats.

I once in travell lodged at a house, at which in my returne I hoped to have lodged againe the next night, but the house was gone in that interim, and I was glad to lodge under a tree:

I once stayed at a place while traveling, and when I returned, I hoped to stay there again the next night, but the place was gone in the meantime, and I was glad to sleep under a tree.

The men make the poles or stakes, but the women make and set up, take downe, order and carry the Mats and householdstuffe.

The men create the poles or stakes, but the women make, set up, take down, organize, and carry the Mats and household items.

Observation in generall.

General observation.

The sociablenesse of the nature of Man appears in the wildest of them, who love society; families, co-habitation, and consociation of houses and towns together.

The sociability of human nature shows up even in the wildest individuals, who cherish community; families, living together, and the joining of houses and towns.

More Particular.

More specific.

1. How busie are the sonnes of men?
How full their heads and hands?
What noyse and tumults in our own,
And eke in Pagan lands?
2. Yet I have found lesse noyse, more peace
In wilde America,
Where women quickly build the house,
And quickly move away.
3. English and Indians busie are,
In parts of their abode;
Yet both stand idle, till God’s call
Sets them to worke for God.

[58]

[58]

CHAP. VII.

Of their Persons and parts of Body.

Uppaquóntup, The head.
Nuppaquóntup, My head.
Wésheck, The hayre.
Wuchechepúnnock, A great bunch of hayre
bound up behind.
Múppacuck, A long locke.

Obs. Yet some cut their haire round, and some as low and as short as the sober English; yet I never saw any so to forget nature it selfe in such excessive length and monstrous fashion, as to the shame of the English Nation, I now (with grief) see my Countrey-men in England are degenerated unto.

Obs. Yet some cut their hair in a round style, and some as short and neat as the reserved English; still, I have never seen anyone forget nature itself by adopting such excessive length and bizarre styles, which brings shame to the English nation. I now (with grief) see my countrymen in England have degenerated to this.

Wuttip, The Braine.—Obs. In the braine their opinion is, that the soule (of which we shall speake in the Chapter of Religion) keeps her chiefe seat and residence:

Wuttip, The Braine.—Obs. In the brain, they believe that the soul (which we will discuss in the Chapter of Religion) holds its primary seat and residence:

For the temper of the braine in quick apprehensions and accurate judgements (to say no more) the most high and soveraign God and Creator, hath not made them inferiour to Europeans.

For the temperament of the brain in quick understanding and accurate judgments (to say no more), the most high and sovereign God and Creator has not made them inferior to Europeans.

The Mauquaûogs, or Men-eaters that live two or three hundred miles West from us, make a delicious monstrous dish of the head and brains of their enemies; which yet is no barre (when the time shall approach) against Gods call and their repentance and who knowes (but) a greater love to the Lord Jesus? great sinners forgiven love much.

The Mauquaûogs, or Men-eaters, who live two or three hundred miles west of us, make a tasty, monstrous dish out of the heads and brains of their enemies; however, this does not prevent them (when the time comes) from God's call and their repentance, and who knows (but) a greater love for the Lord Jesus? Great sinners forgiven love a lot.

Mscáttuck, The fore-head.
Wuskeésuck-quash, Eye, or eyes.
Tiyùsh kusskeésuckquash? Can you not see or where
are your eyes?
Wuchaûn, The nostrills.
Wuttóvwog, quàsh, Eare, eares
Wuttòne,[59] The mouth.
Wéenat, The tongue.
Wépit-teash, Tooth, teeth.
Pummaumpiteùnck, The tooth-ake.

Obs: Which is the onely paine will force their stout hearts to cry; I cannot heare of any disease of the stone amongst them (the corne of the Countrey, with which they are fed from the wombe, being an admirable cleanser and opener:) but the paine of their womens child birth (of which I shall speake afterward in the Chapter of Marriage) never forces their women so to cry, as I have heard some of their Men in this paine.

Obs: The only pain that will make them cry out is one that comes from their hearts; I haven't heard of anyone suffering from kidney stones among them (the grains of the country, which they have been fed with since birth, are excellent cleansers and openers). However, the pain of childbirth for their women (which I will discuss later in the Chapter on Marriage) never makes the women cry out as loudly as I have heard some of their men do in this pain.

In this paine they use a certaine root dried, not much unlike our Ginger.

In this pain, they use a certain dried root that is quite similar to our ginger.

Sítchipuck, The necke.
Qúttuck, The throat.

Timeqúassin, To cut off or behead.—Which they are most skilfull to doe in fight: for whenever they wound, and their arrow sticks in the body of their enemie, they (if they be valorous, and possibly may) they follow their arrow, and falling upon the person wounded and tearing his head a little aside by his Locke, they in the twinckling of an eye fetch off his head though but with a sorry knife.

Timeqúassin, to cut off or behead. They are very skilled at this in battle; whenever they wound an enemy and their arrow sticks in the enemy's body, if they are brave and able, they follow the arrow and, falling upon the wounded person and pulling his head slightly to the side by his hair, they can swiftly sever his head even with a poor-quality knife.

I know the Man yet living, who in time of warre, pretended to fall from his owne campe to the enemie, proffered his service in the front with them against his owne Armie from whence he had revolted. Hee propounded such plausible advantages, that he drew them out to battell, himselfe keeping in the front; but on a sudden, shot their chiefe Leader and Captaine, and being shot, in a trice fetcht off his head, and returned immediately to his owne againe, from whom in pretence (though with this treacherous intention) hee had revolted: his act was false and treacherous, yet herein appeares policie, stoutnesse and activitie, &c.

I know a man who is still alive, who during a war pretended to defect from his own camp to the enemy. He offered his services at the front with them against his own army that he had betrayed. He suggested such convincing advantages that he lured them into battle, keeping himself at the front; but suddenly, he shot their chief leader and captain, and in a flash, he took off his head and immediately returned to his own side, from whom he had pretended to defect (despite his treacherous intention). His actions were deceitful and treacherous, yet they showed cleverness, bravery, and agility, etc.

Napànnog, The breast.
Wuppíttene énash, Arme, Armes.
Wuttàh, The heart.
Wunnêtunita,[60] My heart is good.

Obs: This speech they use whenever they professe their honestie; they naturally confessing that all goodnesse is first in the heart.

Obs: This speech is used whenever they profess their honesty; they naturally admit that all goodness starts in the heart.

Mishquínash, The vaines.
Mishquè, néepuck, The blood.
Uppusquàn, The backe.
Nuppusquànnick, My back, or at my back.
Wunnícheke, Hand.
Wunniskégannash, Hands.
Mokássuck, Nayles.

Obs: They are much delighted after battell to hang up the hands and heads of their enemies: (Riches, long Life, and the Lives of enemies being objects of great delight to all men naturall; but Solomon begged Wisedome before these.)

Obs: They really enjoy hanging up the hands and heads of their enemies after a battle: (Wealth, long life, and the lives of enemies are things that all natural men find incredibly pleasing; but Solomon requested wisdom above these.)

Wunnáks, The bellie.
Apòme, Apòmash, The thigh, the thighs.
Mohcònt, tash, A legge, legs.
Wussètte, tash, A foot, feet.
Wunnichéganash, The toes.
Touwuttínsin, What manner of man?
Tonnúckquaque, Of what bignesse?
Wompésu, Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize. White
Mowêsu, and Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize. Blacke or Swarfish.
Suckêsu, }

Obs: Hence they call a Blackamore (themselves are tawnie, by the Sunne and their annoyntings, yet they are borne white:)

Obs: That's why they call a Blackamoor (they themselves are brown from the sun and their oils, yet they are born white:)

Suckáuttacone, a cole blacke Man. For, sucki is black, and Waûtacone one that weares clothes, whence English, Dutch, French, Scotch, they call Wautaconâuog, or Coatmen.

Suckáuttacone, a coal-black man. For, sucki is black, and Waûtacone means one who wears clothes, which is why English, Dutch, French, and Scottish people refer to him as Wautaconâuog, or Coatmen.

Cummínakese, You are strong.
Minikêsu, Strong.
Minioquêsu, Weake.
Cummmíniocquese, Weake you are.
Qunnaúqussu, A tall man.
Qunnauqussítchick, Tall men.
Tiaquónqussu, Low and short.
Tiaquonqussíchick, Men of lowe stature.
Wunnêtu-wock, Proper and personall.

[61]

[61]

The generall observation from the parts of the bodie.

Nature knowes no difference between Europe and Americans in blood, birth, bodies, &c. God having of one blood made all mankind. Acts 17. and all by nature being children of wrath, Ephes. 2.

Nature knows no difference between Europeans and Americans in blood, birth, bodies, etc. God made all mankind from one blood. Acts 17. And all by nature are children of wrath, Ephes. 2.

More particularly:

Specifically:

Boast not proud English, of thy birth and blood
Thy Brother Indian is by birth as Good.
Of one blood God made Him, and Thee, and All.
As wise, as faire, as strong, as personall.
By nature, wrath’s his portion, thine, no more
Till Grace his soule and thine in Christ restore.
Make sure thy second birth, else thou shalt see
Heaven ope to Indians wild, but shut to thee.

[62]

[62]

CHAP. VIII.

Of Discourse and Newes.

Aunchemokauhettíttea, Let us discourse, or tell newes.
Tocketeáunchim? What newes?
Aaunchemókaw, Tell me your newes.
Cuttaunchemókous, I will tell you newes.
Mautaunchemokouêan, When I have done telling the newes.
Cummautaunchemókous, I have done my newes.

Obs: Their desire of, and delight in newes, is great, as the Athenians, and all Men, more or lesse; a stranger that can relate newes in their owne language, they will stile him Manittóo, a God.

Obs: Their craving for and enjoyment of news is strong, like the Athenians, and all people, more or less; a stranger who can share news in their own language, they will call him Manittóo, a God.

Wutauichéocouôog, I will tell it them.
Awaun mesh aunchemókau, Who brought this newes?
Awaun mesh kuppíttouwaw, Of whom did you heare it?
Upparáunchim, Your newes is true.
Cowavwunnâunchim, He tells false newes.
Nummautanùme, I have spoken enough.
Nsouwussanneme, I am weary with speaking.

Obs: Their Manner is upon any tidings to sit round, double or treble or more, as their numbers be; I have seene neere a thousand in a round, where English could not well neere halfe so many have sitten: Every Man hath his pipe of their Tobacco, and a deepe silence they make, and attention given to him that speaketh; and many of them will deliver themselves, either in a relation of news, or in a consultation, with very emphaticall speech and great action, commonly an houre, and sometimes two houres together.

Obs: Their way is to gather around for any news, sitting close together, sometimes doubling or tripling their numbers. I've seen nearly a thousand people in a circle, where the English couldn't manage to seat even half that many. Each person has their pipe of Tobacco, and they create a deep silence, giving full attention to whoever is speaking. Many of them will express themselves, either sharing news or discussing matters, with very emphatic speech and grand gestures, usually for about an hour, and sometimes even two hours straight.

[63]

[63]

Npenowauntawâumen, I cannot speake your language.
Matta nippánnawen, I lie not.
Cuppánnowem, You lie.
Mattanickoggachoúsk,
Matntianta compaw, I am no lying fellow.
Matntiantásampáwwa,
Achienonâumwem, I speake very true.
Kukkita, Hearken to me.
Kukkakittoùs, I heare you.

Obs: They are impatient (as all Men and God himselfe is) when their speech is not attended and listened to.

Obs: They are impatient (like all humans and God himself) when their words are not heard and acknowledged.

Cuppítous, I understand you.
Cowautous,
Machagenowâutam, I understand not.
Matnowawtawatémina, Wee understand not each other.
Wunnáumwash, Speake the truth.
Coanâumwen, You speake true.

Obs: This word and the next, are words of great flattery which they use each to other, but constantly to their Princes at their speeches, for which, if they be eloquent, they esteeme them Gods as Herod among the Jewes.

Obs: This word and the next are words of heavy flattery that they use with each other, but especially when addressing their Princes in speeches. If they are eloquent, they regard them as Gods like Herod among the Jews.

Wunnâumwaw ewò, He speaks true.
Cuppannawâutous, I doe not believe you.
Cuppannawâuti? Doe you not believe?
Nippannawâutunck ewò, He doth not believe me.
Michéme nippauna wâut am, I shall never believe it.

Obs: As one answered me when I had discoursed about many points of God, of the creation of the Soule, of the danger of it, and the saving it, he assented; but when I spake of the rising againe of the body, he cryed out, I shall never believe this.

Obs: As one answered me when I had talked about many aspects of God, the creation of the soul, its dangers, and how to save it, he agreed; but when I spoke of the resurrection of the body, he shouted, I will never believe this.

Pannóuwa awaun, awaun keesitteouwin, Somebody hath made this lie.
Tattâ Pitch, I cannot tell, it may so come to passe.
Nni, eíu, It is true.
Mat enâno, or mat eâno,[64] It is not true.
Kekutto kâunta, Let us speake together.
Kuttókash, Speake.
Tawhitch mat cuttôan, Why speake you not?
Téaqua ntúnnawen, or, ntéawem? What should I speake.
Wetapímmin, To sit downe.
Wetapwâuwwas, Sit and talke with us.
Taúpowaw, A wise speaker.
Enapwáuwwaw, He speakes Indian.
Eississûmo,
Mattanowawwâuon, matta nowáhea, I know nothing of it.
Pitchnowáuwon, I shall know the truth.
Wunnaumwâuonck,
Wunnaumwáyean, If he say true.

Obs: Canounicus, the old high Sachim of the Nariganset Bay (a wise and peaceable Prince) once in a solemne oration to myself, in a solemne assembly, using this word, said, I have never suffered any wrong to be offered to the English since they landed: nor never will: he often repeated this word, Wunnaunewayeán, Englishman; if the Englishman speake true, if hee meane truly, then shall I goe to my grave in peace, and hope that the English and my posteritie shall live in love and peace together. I replied, that he had no cause (as I hoped) to question Englishmen’s Wunnaumwaúonck, that is, faithfulnesse, he having had long experience of their friendlinesse and trustinesse. He tooke a stick and broke it into ten pieces, and related ten instances (laying downe a stick to every instance) which gave him cause thus to feare and say; I satisfied him in some presently, and presented the rest to the Governours of the English, who, I hope, will be far from giving just cause to have Barbarians to question their Wunnaumwâuonck, or faithfulnesse.

Obs: Canounicus, the old high Sachim of Nariganset Bay (a wise and peaceful leader), once gave a solemn speech to me in an important gathering. He said, "I have never allowed any wrong to be done to the English since they arrived here, nor will I ever." He often repeated this word, Wunnaunewayeán, Englishman; if the Englishman speaks the truth and means it genuinely, then I can go to my grave in peace, hoping that the English and my descendants will live together in love and harmony. I responded that he had no reason (as I hoped) to doubt the Englishmen’s Wunnaumwaúonck, which means faithfulness, as he had long experienced their friendship and trustworthiness. He picked up a stick, broke it into ten pieces, and shared ten examples (laying down a stick for each example) that made him fear and say this. I reassured him about some of them right away and presented the others to the English governors, who I hope will go above and beyond to prevent giving any reason for anyone to question their Wunnaumwâuonck or faithfulness.

Tocketannántum, I'm sorry, but there doesn't seem to be any text provided for me to modernize. Please provide a phrase for me to assist you with!
Pocketunáname, } What doe you thinke?
Pocketeántam? }
Ntunnántum, I thinke.
Neántum,
Nanick nteeâtum,[65] I thinke so too.
Nteatammowonck, That is my thought, or opinion.
Matntunnantámmen, I thinke not so.
Matnteeantámmen,
Nowecóntam, I am glad.
Noweeteántam,
Coanáumatous, I believe you.

Obs: This word they use just as the Greeke tongue doth that verbe, πιςέυειν: for believing or obeying, as it is often used in the new Testament, and they say Coannáumatous, I will obey you.

Obs: They use this word just like the Greek language uses the verb, πιστεύειν: for believing or obeying, as it is often seen in the New Testament, and they say Coannáumatous, I will obey you.

Yo aphéttit, When they are here.

Yo peyáhettit. When they are com. This Ablative case absolute they much use, and comprise much in little; Awaunagress, suck. English-man, men. This they call us, as much as to say, These strangers. Waútacone-nûaog Englishman, men. That is, coat-men, or clothed.

Yo peyáhettit. When they arrive. This Ablative case absolute they use a lot, and cover much in little; Awaunagress, suck. Englishmen, men. This is what they call us, meaning, These strangers. Waútacone-nûaog Englishman, men. That is, coat-men, or clothed.

Cháuquaqock, English-men, properly sword-men.
Wautacónisk, An English woman.
Wautaconémese, An English youth.
Wáske peyáeyan, When you came first.
Wáske peyáhetit, When Englishmen came first.
Wautaconâuog,
Táwhitch peyáhettit, Why come they hither?

Obs: This question they oft put to me: Why come the Englishmen hither? and measuring others by themselves; they say, it is because you want firing; for they, having burnt up the wood in one place, (wanting draughts to bring wood to them) they are faine to follow the wood; and so, to remove to a fresh new place for the woods sake.

Obs: This question they often ask me: Why do the Englishmen come here? And measuring others by themselves; they say it's because you need fuel; because they, having burned up the wood in one spot, (lacking ways to bring wood to them) have to follow the wood; and so, they move to a completely new place for the sake of the woods.

Matta mihtuckqunnunno? Have you no trees?
Mishàunetash,
Máunetash, Great store.
Maunâuog
Wussaumemaunâuog, They are too full of people.
Noonapúock, They have not roome one by another.
Aumáumuwaw,[66] A messenger comes.
Páuosha,
Wawwhawtowâuog, They hollow.
Wauwhaûtowawánawat, ’Tis an alarme.

Obs: If it be in time of warre, he that is a Messenger runs swiftly, and at every towne the Messenger comes, a fresh Messenger is sent: he that is the last, comming within a mile or two of the Court, or chiefe house, he hollowes often, and they that heare, answer him: untill by mutuall hollowing and answering hee is brought to the place of audience, whereby this meanes is gathered a great confluence of people to entertaine the newes.

Obs: If it's during a war, the Messenger runs fast, and at every town the Messenger arrives, a new Messenger is sent out. The last one, coming within a mile or two of the Court or main house, shouts often, and those who hear respond to him. Through this mutual shouting and responding, he is brought to the place of audience, which gathers a large crowd of people to hear the news.

Wussuckwhèke, A letter, which they so call
Wussúckwhonck, from Wussuck-whómmen, To paint;
for, having no letters, their
painting comes the neerest.
Wussúckquash, Write a Letter.
Wussúckwheke, yimmi, Make me a letter.

Obs: That, they have often desired of me upon many occasions; for their good and peace, and the English also, as it hath pleased God to vouchsafe opportunitie.

Obs: They have often asked me for this on many occasions, for their well-being and peace, and the English as well, as it has pleased God to provide the opportunity.

Quenowâuog, They complaine.
Tawhitch quenawáyean? Why complaine you?
Muccò, It is true you say.
Tuckawntéawem? What should I say to it.

The generall Observation from their Discourse and Newes.

The whole race of Mankind is generally infected with an itching desire of hearing Newes.

The entire human race is generally plagued by an overwhelming desire to hear the latest news.

More particular:

More specific:

1. Mans restlesse soule hath restlesse eyes and eares,
Wanders in change of sorrows, cares and feares.
Faine would it (Bee like) suck by the ears, by the eye
Something that might his hunger satisfie:
The Gospel, or glad tidings onely can
Make glad the English and the Indian.

[67]

[67]

CHAP. IX.

Of the time of the day.

Obs: They are punctuall in measuring their Day by the Sunne, and their Night by the Moon and the Starres, and their lying much abroad in the ayre; and so living in the open fields, occasioneth even the youngest amongst them to be very observant of those heavenly lights.

Obs: They are punctual in measuring their day by the sun, and their night by the moon and the stars. Their frequent time spent outdoors in the open fields makes even the youngest among them very observant of those heavenly lights.

Mautàbon, Chicháuquat wompan, It is day.
Ampatâuban, It is broad day.
Touwuttúttan? How high is the Sunne? that is, What is’t a clocke?
Páshisha, It is Sunne-rise.
Nummáttaqúaw, Fore-noone.
Yahen Paushaqúaw, Allmost noone.
Páweshaquaw, Noone.
Quttùkquaquaw, After dinner.
Panicómpaw,
Nawwâuwqaw, After-noone.
Yo wuttúttan, The Sunne thus high.
Yahen wàiyàuw, Allmost Sun-set.
Wayaàwi, The Sun is set.
Wunnáuquit, Evening.
Póppakunnetch, auchaugotch, Darke night.
Túppaco, and Otematíppocat, Toward night.
Nanashowatíppocat, Midnight.
Chouóeatch, About Cockcrowing.
Kitompanisha, Breake of day.
Yó Tàunt nipéean, The Sun thus high, I will come.

Obs: They are punctuall in their promises of Keeping[68] time; and sometimes have charged mee with a lye for not punctually keeping time, though hindred.

Obs: They are punctual in their promises of keeping [68] time; and sometimes have accused me of lying for not keeping time, even though I was hindered.

Yo tàunt cuppeeyâumen, Come by the Sunne thus high.
Anamakéesuck, This day.
Saûop, To morrow.
Wussâume tátsha, It is too late.
Tiaquockaskéesakat, A short day.
Quawquonikéesakat, A long day.
Quawquonikeesaqútcheas, Long dayes.
Nquittakeesiquóckat,      } One dayes walke.
Nquíttakeespúmmishen, }
Paukúnnum, Darke.
Wequâi, Light.
Wequáshim, Moon-light.

The general Observation from their time of the Day.

The Sunne and Moone, in the observation of all the Sonnes of Men, even the wildest, are the great Directors of the day and night; as it pleased God to appoint in the first Creation.

The Sun and Moon, in the eyes of all humanity, even the wildest among us, are the main guides of day and night, as God intended when He created everything.

More particular.

More specific.

1. The Indians find the Sun so sweet,
He is a God they say;
Giving them light, and heat, and fruit,
And guidance all the day.
2. They have no helpe of Clock or Watch,
And Sunne they overprize.
Having those artificiall helps, the Sun
We unthankfully despise.
3. God is a sunne and shield,
A thousand times more bright
Indians, or English, though they see
Yet how few prize his light.

[69]

[69]

CHAP. X.

Of the Season of the Yeere.

Nquittaqúnnegat, One day.
Neesqúnnagat, 2 dayes.
Shuckqunóckat, 3 dayes.
Yowunnóckat &c. 4 dayes.
Piuckaqúnnagat, 10 dayes.
Piuckaqunnagat nabnaquìt, 11 dayes.
Piuckaqunnagat nabneeze &c. 12 dayes.
Neesneechektashuck qunnóckat, 20 dayes.
Neesneechektashuck 21 dayes.
qunnockat-nabnaquít &c.
Séquan, The Spring.
Aukeeteámitch, Spring, or seed-time.
Néepun, &
Quaqúsquan, Summer.
Taquònck, Fall of leafe and Autumne.
Papóne, Winter.
Saséquacup, This Spring last.
Yo neepúnnacup, This Summer last.
Yò taquónticup, This Harvest last.
Papapôcup, Winter last.
Yaûnedg, The last yeere.
Nippaûus, The Sunne.
Munnánnock,
Nanepaûshat, The Moone.
Nquitpawsuckenpaûus, 1 Moneth.
Neespausuck npaûus, 2 Moneths.
Shwe pausuck npaûus &c. 3 Moneths.
Neesneáhettit, 2 Moneths.
Shwinneáhettit,[70] 3 Moneths.
Yowinneáhettit, &c. 4 Moneths.

Obs: They have thirteen Moneths according to the severall Moones; and they give to each of them significant names: as,

Obs: They have thirteen months based on the different moons, and they assign significant names to each of them, such as,

Sequanakéeswush, Spring moneth.
Neepunnakéeswush, Summer moneth.
Taquontikéeswush, Harvest moneth, &c.
Paponakéeswush, &c. Winter moneth, &c.
Nquittecautúmmo, 1 Yeere.
Tashecautúmmo? How many Yeeres?
Chashecautúmmo cuttáppemus? How many yeeres since you were borne?
Neesecautúmmo, 2 Yeere.
Shwecautúmmo, 3 Yeere.
Yowecautúmmo, 4 Yeere.
Piukquecautúmmo, 10 Yeere.
Piuck quecautúmmo, nabnaquìt, &c. 11 Yeere, &c.

Obs: If the yeere proove drie, they have great and solemne meetings from all parts at one high place, to supplicate their Gods, and to beg raine, and they will continue in this worship ten dayes, a fortnight, yea, three weekes, untill raine come.

Obs: If the year turns out dry, they have big and formal gatherings from all around at one high place to pray to their gods and ask for rain, and they will keep up this worship for ten days, two weeks, or even three weeks until the rain arrives.

Tashínash papónash? How many winters?
Aháuqushapapòne, A sharpe winter.
Kéesqush keesuckquâi, By day.
Náukocks nokan-náwi, By night.

Generall Observation from their Seasons of the Yeere.

The Sunne, and Moone, and Starres and Seasons of the yeere doe preach a God to all the sonnes of men, that they which know no letters, doe yet read an eternall Power and Godhead in these.

The sun, the moon, the stars, and the seasons of the year preach to all humanity, showing those who can't read still recognize an eternal power and divinity in them.

More speciall:

More specifically:

1. The Sun and Moone and Stars doe preach,
The Dayes and Nights sound out
Spring, Summer, Fall, and Winter eke,
Each Moneth and Yeere about.
[71]
2. So that the wildest sonnes of men
Without excuse shall say,
God’s righteous sentence past on us,
(In dreadfull judgement day.)
If so, what doome is theirs that see,
Not onely Nature’s light,
But Sun of Righteousnesse, yet chose
To live in darkest Night?

[72]

[72]

CHAP. XI.

Of Travell.

Máyi, A way.
Mayúo? Is there a way?
Mat mayanúnno, There is no way.
Peemáyagât, A little way.
Mishimmáyagat, A great path.
Machípscat, A stone path.

Obs: It is admirable to see, what paths their naked hardned feet have made in the wildernesse in most stony and rockie places.

Obs: It’s impressive to see the paths their bare, tough feet have created in the wilderness, even in the stoniest and rockiest areas.

Nnatotemúckaun, I will aske the way.
Kunnatótemous, I will inquire of you.
Kunnatotemì? Doe you aske me?
Tou nishin méyi? Where lies the way?
Kokotemíinnea méyi, Shew me the way.
Yo áinshick méyi, There the way lies.
Kukkakótemous, I will shew you.
Yo cummittamáyon, There is the way you must goe.
Yo chippachâusin, There the way divides.
Maúchatea, A guide.
Maûchase, Be my guide.

Obs: The wildernesse being so vast, it is a mercy, that for a hire a Man shall never want guides, who will carry provisions, and such as hire them over the Rivers and Brookes, and find out oftentimes hunting houses, or other lodgings at night.

Obs: The wilderness is so vast that it’s a blessing that there are always guides available for hire who will carry supplies and help you cross rivers and streams, and often find hunting cabins or other places to stay at night.

Anóce wénawash, Hire him.
Kuttánnoonsh, I will hire you.
Kuttaúnckquittaunch, I will pay you.
Kummuchickónckquatous, I will pay you well.
Tocketaonckquittíinnea, What wil you give me?
Cummáuchanish, I will conduct you.
Yò aûnta,[73] Let us goe that way.
Yò cuttâunan, Goe that way.
Yo mtúnnock, The right hand.
Yo nmúnnatch, The left hand.
Cowéchaush, I will goe with you.
Wétash, Goe along.
Cowéchaw ewò, He will goe with you.
Cowechauatimmin, I will goe with you.
Wechauatíttea, Let us accompany.
Taûbot wétayean, I thanke you for your company.

Obs: I have heard of many English lost, and have oft been lost my selfe, and my selfe and others have often been found, and succoured by the Indians.

Obs: I have heard of many English who have been lost, and I have often been lost myself, and both I and others have often been found and helped by the Indians.

Pitchcowáwwon, You will lose your way.
Meshnowáwwon, I lost my way.
Nummauchèmin, I will be going.
Ntanniteímmin,
Mammauchêtuck, Let us be going.
ânakiteunck,
Memauchêwi, anittui, He is gone.
Memauchegushánnick, They are gone.
Anakugushánnick,
Tunnockuttòme,
Tunnockkuttoyeâim, Whither goe you?
Tunnockkuttínshem,
Nnegónshem, I will goe before.
Cuppompáish, I will stay for you.
Negónshesh, Goe before.
Mittummayaûcup, The way you went before.
Cummáttanish, I will follow you.
Cuppahímmin, Stay for me.
Tawhich quaunquaquêan? Why doe you run so?
Nowecóntum púmmishem, I have a mind to travell.
Konkenuphshâuta, Let us goe apace.
Konkenúppe, Goe apace.
Michéme nquaunquaquêmin, I have run alwayes.
Yo ntoyamâushem, I goe this pace.

Obs: They are generally quick on foot, brought up from the breasts to running; their legs being also[74] from the wombe stretcht and bound up in a strange way on their Cradle backward, as also anointed; yet have they some that excell: So that I have knowne many of them run betweene fourescoure or an hundred miles in a Summers day, and back in two dayes: they doe also practice running of Races; and commonly in the Summer, they delight to goe without shoes, although they have them hanging at their backs: they are so exquisitely skilled in all the body and bowels of the Countrey (by reason of their huntings) that I have often been guided twentie, thirtie, yea, sometimes fortie miles through the woods, a streight course, out of any path.

Obs: They are usually fast on their feet, raised from infancy to run; their legs are also[74] stretched and bound up in a strange way in their cradles, and they are anointed. Still, some are exceptional athletes: I’ve known many of them to run between forty or a hundred miles in a summer day and back in two days. They also practice running in Races; and typically in the summer, they enjoy going without shoes, even though they carry them on their backs. They are so incredibly skilled in navigating the land (due to their hunting) that I have often been guided twenty, thirty, even sometimes forty miles through the woods in a straight line, without any path.

Yò wuchê, From hence.
Tounúckquaque yo wuchê, How far from hence?
Yò anúckquaque, So farre.
Yo anuckquaquêse, So little a way.
Waunaquêse, A little way.
Aukeewushaûog, They goe by land.
Mìshoon hómwock, They goe or come by water.
Naynayoûmewot, A horse.
Wunnia naynayoûmewot, He rides on Horse-back.

Obs: Having no horses, they covet them above other Cattell, rather preferring ease in riding, then their profit and belly, by milk and butter from Cowes and Goats, and they are loth to come to the English price for any.

Obs: Without horses, they desire them more than any other livestock, valuing the comfort of riding over the benefits of milk and butter from cows and goats, and they are unwilling to meet the English price for any.

Aspumméwi, He is not gone by.
Aspumméwock, They are not gone by.
Awanick payánchick? Who come there?
Awanick negonshachick? Who are these before us?
Yo cuppummesicómmin, Crosse over into the way there.
Cuppì-machàug, Thick wood: a Swamp.

Obs: These thick Woods and Swamps (like the Boggs to the Irish) are the Refuges for women and children in Warre, whilst the Men fight. As the Country is wondrous full of Brookes and Rivers, so doth it also abound with fresh ponds, some of many miles compasse.

Obs: These thick woods and swamps (like the bogs to the Irish) serve as safe havens for women and children during war, while the men fight. Since the area is full of brooks and rivers, it also has plenty of fresh ponds, some spanning many miles.

[75]

[75]

Níps-nípsash, Pond, Ponds.
Wèta wétedg, The woods on fire.
Wussaumpatámmin, To view or looke about.
Wussaum patámoonck, A Prospect.
Wuttocékemin, To wade.
Tocekétuck, Let us wade.
Tou wuttáuqussin? How deepe?
Yò ntaúqussin, Thus deep.
Kunníish, I will carry you.
Kuckqússuckqun, You are heavy.
Kunnáukon, You are light.
Pasúckquish, Rise.
Anakish, maúchish: Goe.
Quaquìsh, Runne.
Nokus káuatees, Meet him.
Nockuskauatítea, Let us meet.
Neenmeshnóckuskaw, I did meet.

Obs: They are joyfull in meeting of any in travell, and will strike fire either with stones or sticks, to take Tobacco, and discourse a little together.

Obs: They are cheerful when meeting anyone while traveling, and they will strike fire using stones or sticks to smoke tobacco and chat a bit together.

Mesh Kunnockqus kaua tímmin? Did you meet? &c.
Yo Kuttauntapímmin, Let us rest here.
Kussackquêtuck, Let us sit downe.
Yo appíttuck, Let us sit here.
Nissówanis, I am weary.
Nissowànishkaûmen,
Nickqússaqus, I am lame.
Ntouagonnausinnúmmni, We are distrest, undone or in misery.

Obs: They use this word properly in wandring toward Winter night, in which case I have been many a night with them, and many times also alone, yet alwayes mercifully preserved.

Obs: They use this word correctly in wandering toward winter nights, where I have spent many nights with them, and many times alone, yet always mercifully preserved.

Teâno wonck nippéeam, I will be here by and by againe.
Mat Kunníckansh, I will not leave you.
Aquie Kunnickkatshash, Doe not leave me?
Tawhítch nickatshiêan? Why doe you forsake me?
Wuttánho, A staffe.
Yó úsh Wuttánho, Use this staffe.

[76]

[76]

Obs: Sometimes a man shall meet a lame man or an old Man with a Staffe: but generally a Staffe is a rare sight in the hand of the eldest, their Constitution is so strong, I have upon occasion travelled many a score, yea many a hundred mile amongst them, without need of stick or staffe, for any appearance of danger amongst them: yet it is a rule amongst them, that it is not good for a Man to travell without a Weapon nor alone.

Obs: Sometimes a man will encounter a disabled person or an elderly person with a cane: but generally, it’s unusual to see an elderly person using a cane, as their bodies are so robust. I have, on some occasions, traveled many miles, even hundreds of miles, among them without needing a stick or a cane, as there’s rarely any danger. However, it’s a rule among them that it’s not wise for a man to travel without a weapon or alone.

Paquáttin, Frost.
Auke taquátsha, The ground is frozen.
Séip taquáttin, The river is frozen.
Nowánnesin, I have forgotten.
Nippittakúnnamun, I must goe back.

Obs: I once travelled with neere 200 who had word of neere 700 Enemies in the way, yet generally they all resolved that it was a shame to feare and goe back.

Obs: I once traveled with nearly 200 people who were warned about almost 700 enemies on the road, yet for the most part, they all decided that it would be shameful to be afraid and turn back.

Nippanishkokómmin, I have let fall something.
Npussago kommìn,
Mattaâsu, A little way.
Naûwot, A great way.
Náwwatick, Farre of at Sea.
Ntaquatchuwaûmen, I goe up hill.
Taguatchòwash, Goe up hill.
Waumsu, Downe hill.
Mauúnshesh, Goe slowly or gently.
Mauanisháuta, Let us goe gently.
Tawhìtch chechequnnuwáyean? Why doe you rob me?
Aquie chechequnnuwásh, Doe not rob me.
Chechequnnuwáchick, Robbers.
Chechequnníttin, There is a Robbery committed.
Kemineantúock, They murder each other.

Obs: If any robbery fall out in Travell, between Persons of diverse States, the offended State sends for Justice; If no Justice bee granted and recompence made, they grant out a kind of Letter of Mart to take satisfaction themselves, yet they are carefull[77] not to exceed in taking from others, beyond the proportion of their owne losse.

Obs: If any robbery occurs while traveling between people from different states, the offended state requests justice. If no justice is provided and compensation is not made, they issue a type of Letter of Marque to seek satisfaction on their own, but they are careful not to take from others more than the amount of their own loss.[77]

Wúskontawaúnn kemineiucqun, I feare some will murther mee.

Obs: I could never heare that Murthers or Robberies are comparably so frequent, as in parts of Europe amongst the English, French, &c.

Obs: I could never hear that murders or robberies are as common as in parts of Europe among the English, French, etc.

Cutchachewussímmin, You are almost there.
Kiskecuppeeyáumen, You are a little short.
Cuppeeyáumen, Now you are there.
Muckquétu, Swift.
Cummúmmuckquete, You are swift.
Cussásaqus, You are slow.
Sassaqushàuog, They are slow.
Cuttinneapúmmishem, Will you passe by?
Wuttineapummushâuta, Let us passe by.
Keeatshaûta, I come for no business.
Ntinneapreyaûmen, In vaine or to no purpose.
Acoûwe,
Ntackówvvepeyaùn, I have lost my labour.
Cummautússakou, You have mist him.
Kihtummâyi-wussáuhumwi, He went just now forth.
Pittúckish, Goe back.
Pittuckétuck, Let us goe back.
Pónewhush, Lay downe your burthens.

Generall Observations of their Travell.

As the same Sun shines on the Wildernesse that doth on a Garden! so the same faithfull and all sufficient God, can comfort, feede, and safely guide even through a desolate howling Wildernesse.

As the same sun shines on the wilderness as it does on a garden, the same faithful and all-sufficient God can comfort, provide for, and safely guide us even through a desolate, howling wilderness.

More particular:

More specific:

1. God makes a path, provides a Guide,
And feeds in Wildernesse!
His glorious name while breath remaines,
O that I may confesse.
2. Lost many a time, I have had no Guide;
No house, but hollow tree!
[78]
In stormy winter night no Fire,
No Food, no Company.
3. In him I have found a House, a Bed,
A Table, Company;
No cup so bitter, buts’ made sweet,
When God shall sweetning be.

[79]

[79]

CHAP. XII.

Concerning the Heavens and Heavenly Lights.

Kéesuck, The Heavens.
Keesucquíu, Heavenward.
Aúke, Aukeaseíu, Downwards.
Nippâwus, The Sun.
Keesuckquànd, A name of the Sun.

(Obs:) By which they acknowledge the Sun, and adore for a God or divine power.

(Obs:) By which they acknowledge the Sun, and worship it as a God or divine power.

Munnánnock, A name of the Sun.
Nanepaùshat, and   } The Moone.
Munnànnock,   }
Wequáshim, A light Moone.
Pashpíshea, The Moone is up.
Yo wuttúttan, So high.

Obs: And so they use the same rule, and words for the course of the Moone in the Night, as they use for the course of the Sun by Day, which wee mentioned in the Chapter of the Houre, or time of the Day concerning the Sunnes rising, course, or Sunne setting.

Obs: They apply the same rules and words for the Moon's movement at night as they do for the Sun's movement during the day, which we discussed in the chapter on the hour or time of day related to the Sun's rising, path, or setting.

Yò Ockquitteunk, A new Moone.
Paushésui,
Yo wompanámmit, Halfe Moone.

Obs: The Moone so old, which they measure by the setting of it, especially when it shines till

Obs: The Moon is so ancient, which they gauge by its setting, especially when it shines until

Wómpan, or day.
Anóckqus, anócksuck, A starre, starres.

Obs: By occasion of their frequent lying in the Fields and Woods, they much observe the Starres, and their very children can give Names to many of them, and observe their Motions, and they have the same words for their rising, courses and setting, as for the Sunne or Moone, as before.

Obs: Because they often spend time in the Fields and Woods, they pay a lot of attention to the Stars, and even their children can name many of them and track their movements. They use the same words for their rising, paths, and setting as they do for the Sun or Moon, just like before.

[80]

[80]

Mosk or Paukúnawaw the great Beare, or Charles Waine, which words Mosk or Paukúnnawwaw signifies a Beare, which is so much the more observable, because, in most Languages that signe or Constellation is called the Beare.

Mosk or Paukúnawaw, the great Bear, or Charles Wain, with the words Mosk or Paukúnnawwaw meaning Bear, is particularly noteworthy because, in most languages, that sign or constellation is referred to as the Bear.

Shwishcuttowwáuog, The Golden Metewand.
Mishánnock, The morning Starre.
Chippápuock, The Brood-hen, &c.

Generall Observations of the Heavenly Bodies.

The Wildest sons of Men heare the preaching of the Heavens, the Sun, Moone, and Starres, yet not seeking after God the Maker are justly condemned, though they never have nor despise other preaching, as the civiliz’d World hath done.

The wildest sons of men hear the message of the heavens, the sun, moon, and stars, yet they do not seek after God the Creator and are justly condemned, even though they have never rejected or looked down on other teachings, as the civilized world has done.

More particular:

More specific:

1. When Sun doth rise, the Starres doe set,
Yet there’s no need of light,
God shines a Sunne most glorious,
When creatures all are Night.
2. The very Indian Boyes can give,
To many Starres their name,
And know their Course and therein doe,
Excell the English tame.
3. English and Indians none enquire,
Whose hand these Candles hold:
Who gives these stars their names himself
More bright ten thousand fold.

[81]

[81]

CHAP. XIII.

Of the Weather.

T Ocke tussinnámmin kéesuck, What thinke you of the Weather?
Wekineaûquat, Faire Weather.
Wekinnàuquocks, When it is faire Weather.
Tahkì or tátakki, Cold Weather.
Tahkèes, Cold.

Obs. It may bee wondred why since New-England is about 12 degrees neerer to the Sun, yet some part of Winter, it is there ordinarily more cold then here in England: the reason is plaine: all Ilands are warmer then maine Lands and Continents, England being an Iland, Englands winds are Sea winds, which are commonly more thick and vapoury, and warmer winds: the Nor-West wind (which occasioneth New-England cold) comes over the cold frozen Land, and over many millions of Loads of Snow: and yet the pure wholsomenesse of the Aire is wonderfull, and the warmth of the Sunne, such in the sharpest weather, that I have often seen the Natives Children runne about starke naked in the coldest dayes, and the Indians Men and Women lye by a Fire, in the Woods in the coldest nights, and I have been often out myselfe such nights without fire, mercifully and wonderfully preserved.

Obs. It might be wondered why, even though New England is about 12 degrees closer to the Sun, it is often colder during some parts of winter than here in England: the reason is simple: all islands are warmer than mainland lands and continents. Since England is an island, its winds are sea breezes, which are generally thicker, more humid, and warmer. The northwest wind (which causes the cold in New England) comes over the cold, frozen land and across millions of loads of snow. Yet, the air is remarkably pure and refreshing, and the warmth of the sun is such, even in the harshest weather, that I have often seen Native children running around completely naked on the coldest days, and the Indians—both men and women—lying by a fire in the woods on the coldest nights. I have also often been out myself on such nights without a fire and miraculously and wonderfully kept safe.

Taúkocks, Cold weather.
Káusitteks, Hot weather.
Kussúttah, It is hot.
Núckqusquatchnnóonakom, I am a cold.
Nickqussittâunum, I sweat.
Mattáuqus, A cloud.
Máttaquat, It is overcast.
Cúppaquat,
Sókenun, ánaquat, Raine.
Anamakéesucksókenun, It will raine to day.
Sókenitch, When it raines.
Sóchepo, or Cône,[82] Snow.
Animanâukocksóshepo, It will snow to night.
Sóchepwutch, When it snowes.
Mishúnnan, A great raine.
Pâuqui pâuquaquát, It holds up.
Nnáppi, Drie.
Nnáppaquat, Drie weather.
Tópu, A frost.
Missittópu, A great frost.
Capàt, Ice.
Néechipog, The Deaw.
Míchokat, A Thaw.
Míchokateh, When it thawes.
Missuppâugatch, When the rivers are open.
Cutshâusha, The Lightning.
Neimpâuog, Thunder.
Neimpáug pesk hómwock, Thunderbolts are shot.

Obs: From this the Natives conceiving a consimilitude between our Guns and Thunder, call a Gunne Péskunck, and to discharge Peskhommin that is to thunder.

Obs: From this, the Natives seeing a similarity between our guns and thunder, call a gun Péskunck, and to fire Peskhommin, which means to thunder.

Observation generall of the Weather.

That judgement which the Lord Jesus pronounced against the Weather-wise (but ignorant of the God of the Weather) will fall most justly upon those Natives, and all Men who are wise in Naturall things, but willingly blind in spirituall.

That judgment that Lord Jesus made against those who are wise about the weather (but ignorant of the God who controls it) will justly apply to those natives and all people who are knowledgeable in natural matters but deliberately blind in spiritual ones.

English and Indians spie a storme
And seeke a hiding place:
O Hearts of stone that thinke and dreame,
Th’ everlasting stormes t’out face.
Proud filthy Sodome saw the Sunne
Shine ore her head most bright;
The very day that turn’d she was
To Stincking heaps, ’fore night.
How many millions now alive,
Within few yeeres shall rot?
O blest that Soule, whose portion is
That Rocke that changeth not.

[83]

[83]

CHAP. XIV.

Of the Winds.

W Aûpi, The Wind.
Wâupanash, The Winds.
Tashínash waupanash, How many winds are there?

Obs: Some of them account of seven, some eight, or nine; and in truth, they doe upon the matter reckon and observe not onely the foure but the eight Cardinall winds although they come not to the accurate division of the 32: upon the 32 points of the compasse as we doe.

Obs: Some of them count seven, some eight, or nine; and honestly, they consider not only the four but also the eight cardinal winds, even though they don't get to the precise division of the 32. They don't break it down into the 32 points of the compass like we do.

Nanúmmatin, & The North wind.
Sunnâdin,
Chepewéssin, The North east.
Sáchimoachepewéssin, Strong North east wind.
Nopâtin, The East wind.
Nanóckquittin, The South east wind.
Touwúttin, South wind.
Papônetin, West wind.
Chékesu, The Northwest.
Chékesitch, When the wind blowes Northwest.
Tucketunnántum? What thinke you?
Nqénowhick wouttín, I Stay for a wind.
Tou pìtch wuttin, Where will the wind be?
Yo pìtch wuttìn Sàuop, Here the wind will be to morrow.
Pitch Sowwanishew, It will be Southwest.

Obs: This is the pleasingest, warmest wind in the Climate, most desired of the Indians, making faire weather ordinarily; and therefore they have a tradition, that to the Southwest, which they call Sowwainiù the Gods chiefly dwell; and hither the soules of all their Great and Good Men and women goe.

Obs: This is the most pleasant, warmest wind in the climate, widely desired by the Indians, usually bringing nice weather; and because of that, they have a tradition that to the Southwest, which they call Sowwainiù, the Gods primarily reside; and here the souls of all their great and good men and women go.

This Southwest wind is called by the New-English the sea turne, which comes from the Sunne in the[84] Morning, about nine or ten of the Clock Southeast, and about South, and then strongest Southwest in the after-noone, and towards night, when it dies away.

This Southwest wind is referred to by the New-English as the sea turne, which originates from the Sun in the[84] morning, around nine or ten o'clock in the Southeast, then about South, and becomes strongest Southwest in the afternoon, tapering off towards night.

It is rightly called the Sea turne, because the wind commonly all the Summer, comes off from the North and Northwest in the night, and then turnes againe about from the South in the day: as Solomon speaks of the vanitie of the Winds in their changes, Eccles. 1. 6.

It’s rightly called the Sea turne because the wind usually comes from the North and Northwest at night during the summer, and then shifts to the South during the day. As Solomon talks about the futility of the winds in their changes, Eccles. 1. 6.

Mishâupan, A great wind.
Mishitáshin, A storme.
Wunnágehan, or Faire wind.
Wunnêgin waúpi,
Wunnêgitch wuttìn, When the wind is faire.
Mattágehan, A crosse wind.
Wunnágehatch, When the wind comes faire.
Mattágehatch, When the wind is crosse.
Cowunnogehúckamen, You have a faire wind.
Cummattagehúckamen, The wind is against you.
Nummattagehúckamen, The wind is against mee.

Generall Observations of the Wind.

God is wonderfully glorious in bringing the winds out of his Treasure, and riding upon the wings of those winds in the eyes of all the sonnes of men in all Coasts of the world.

God is amazingly glorious in bringing the winds out of His Treasure and riding on the wings of those winds for all the sons of men across the world.

More particular.

More specific.

English and Indian both Observe
The various blasts of wind:
And both I have heard in dreadfull stormes
Cry out aloud, I have sinn’d.
But when the stormes are turn’d to calmes
And seas grow smooth and still;
Both turne (like swine) to wallow in,
The filth of former will.
’Tis not a storme on sea, or shore,
’Tis not the Word that can;
But ’tis the spirit or Breath of God
That must renew the Man.

[85]

[85]

CHAP. XV.

Of Fowle.

NPesháwog, } Fowle
Pussekesesuck, }
Ntauchâumen, I goe a fowling or hunting.
Auchaûi, Hee is gone to hunt or fowle.
Pepemôi, He is gone to fowle.
Wómpissacuk, An Eagle.
Wompsacuckquâuog, Eagle.
Néyhom, mâuog, Turkies.
Paupock, sûog, Partridges.
Aunckuck, quâuog, Heath cocks.
Chógan èuck, Black-bird, Black-birds.

Obs. Of this sort there be millions, which are great devourers of the Indian corne as soon as it appeares out of the ground; unto this sort of Birds, especially, may the mysticall Fowles, the Divells be well resembled (and so it pleaseth the Lord Jesus himselfe to observe Matth. 13.) which mysticall Fowle follow the sowing of the Word, and picke it up from loose and carelesse hearers, as these Black-birds follow the materiall seed.

Obs. There are millions of these kinds that quickly devour the Indian corn as soon as it breaks through the ground; to these Birds, in particular, the mystical Fowls, the Devils, can be compared well (as it pleases the Lord Jesus himself to note Matth. 13.) These mystical Fowls follow the spreading of the Word and snatch it away from careless and inattentive listeners, just like these Blackbirds follow the physical seed.

Against the Birds the Indians are very carefull, both to set their corne deep enough that it may have a strong root not so apt to be pluckt up (not too deep lest they bury it, and it never come up:) as also they put up little watch-houses in the middle of their fields, in which they, or their biggest children lodge, and early in the Morning prevent the Birds, &c.

Against the birds, the Indians are very careful, both to plant their corn deep enough so it has a strong root that won't easily get pulled up (but not too deep that they bury it and it never grows) and also to set up little watchhouses in the middle of their fields, where they or their older children stay, to scare away the birds early in the morning, etc.

Kokókehom, An Owle.
Ohómous,
Kaukont-tuock, Crow, Crowes.

[86]

[86]

Obs: These birds, although they doe the corne also some hurt, yet scarce will one Native amongst an hundred will kil them, because they have a tradition, that the Crow brought them at first an Indian Graine of Corne in one Eare and an Indian or French Beane in another, from the Great God Kautántouwits field in the Southwest from whence they hold came all their Corne and beanes.

Obs: These birds, even though they do damage to the corn, you can hardly find one Native in a hundred who will kill them, because they have a tradition that the Crow originally brought them an Indian corn seed in one ear and an Indian or French bean in the other, from the Great God Kautántouwits field in the Southwest, from where they believe all their corn and beans came.

Hònck, hònckock, Goose, Geese.
Wómpatuck-quâuog, Swan, Swans.
Wéquash-shâuog,
Munnûcks-munnûcksuck, Brants, or Brantgeese.
Quequécum-mâuog, Ducks.

Obs: The Indians having abundance of these sorts of Foule upon their waters, take great paines to kill any of them with their Bow and Arrowes; and are marvellous desirous of our English Guns, powder and shot (though they are wisely and generally denied by the English) yet with those which they get from the French, and some others (Dutch and English) they kill abundance of Fowle, being naturally excellent marks-men; and also more hardned to endure the weather, and wading, lying, and creeping on the ground, &c.

Obs: The Indians have a lot of these kinds of birds on their waters and work hard to hunt them with their bows and arrows. They are very eager for our English guns, powder, and shot (although these are usually and wisely withheld by the English). However, with what they obtain from the French and others (Dutch and English), they hunt plenty of birds, being naturally skilled marksmen. They are also more accustomed to enduring the weather, wading, lying down, and creeping on the ground, etc.

I once saw an exercise of training the English, when all the English had mist the mark set up to shoot at, an Indian with his owne piece (desiring leave to shoot) onely hit it.

I once witnessed a training exercise for the English, where everyone missed the target they were supposed to shoot at, but an Indian with his own gun (who asked for permission to shoot) was the only one who hit it.

Kitssuog, Cormorants.

Obs: These they take in the night time, where they are asleepe on rocks, off at Sea, and bring in at break of day great store of them:

Obs: They catch these at night while they’re asleep on rocks, out at sea, and bring in a large amount of them at dawn:

Yo aquéchinock, There they swim.
Nipponamouôog, I lay nets for them.

Obs: This they doe onshore, and catch many fowle upon the plaines, and feeding under okes upon akrons, as Geese, Turkies, Cranes, and others &c.

Obs: They do this on land, catching many birds in the fields, feeding under oak trees on acorns, such as geese, turkeys, cranes, and others, etc.

Ptowéi, It is fled.
Ptowewushánnick, They are fled.
Wunnùp, pash, Wing, Wings.
Wunnúppaníckánawhone, Wing-Shot.
Wuhóckgockánwhone,[87] Body-Shot:
Wuskówhàn, A Pigeon.
Wuskowhánannûaog, Pigeons.
Wuskowhannanaûkit, Pigeon Countrie.

Obs: In that place these Fowle breed abundantly, and by reason of their delicate Food (especially in Strawberrie time when they pick up whole large Fields of the old grounds of the Natives), they are a delicate fowle, and because of their abundance, and the facility of killing them, they are and may be plentifully fed on.

Obs: In that place, these birds breed in great number, and because of their rich diet (especially during strawberry season when they gather in large fields of the natives' old grounds), they are a tasty bird. Due to their abundance and how easy they are to catch, they can be fed on in plenty.

Sachim: a little Bird about the bignesse of a swallow, or lesse, to which the Indians give that name because of its Sachim or Princelike courage and Command over greater Birds, that a Man shall often see this small Bird pursue and vanquish and put to flight the Crow and other Birds farre bigger than itselfe.

Sachim: a small bird about the size of a swallow, or even smaller, which the Indians call that because of its Sachim or princely courage and dominance over larger birds. Often, you can see this little bird chase, defeat, and drive away crows and other birds much bigger than itself.

Sowwanakitauwaw, They go to the Southward.

That is the saying of the Natives, when the Geese and other Fowle at the approach of Winter betake themselves in admirable Order and discerning their Course even all the night long.

That’s what the Natives say when the Geese and other birds prepare for Winter, flying in impressive formation and navigating their path all through the night.

Chepewâukitaûog, They fly Northward.

That is when they returne in the Spring. There are abundance of singing Birds whose names I have little as yet enquired after, &c.

That’s when they return in the Spring. There are plenty of singing birds whose names I haven't really looked into yet, etc.

The Indians of Martins vineyard, at my late being amongst them, report generally, and confidently, of some Islands, which lie off from them to Sea, from whence every Morning early, certaine Fowles come and light amongst them, and returne at Night to lodging, which Island or Islands are not yet discovered, though probably, by other Reasons they give, there is Land, &c.

The Indians of Martha's Vineyard, during my recent time with them, generally and confidently talk about some islands that are located offshore, from where certain birds come every morning and land among them, returning at night to roost. These islands have not yet been discovered, but based on other reasons they provide, there is likely land there, etc.

Taûnek-kaûog, Crane, Cranes.
Wushówunan, The hawke.

Which the Indians keep tame about their houses to keepe the little Birds from their Corne.

Which the Indians keep domesticated around their homes to protect the little birds from their corn.

The generall Observation of Fowle.

How sweetly doe all the severall sorts of Heavens Birds, in all Coasts of the World, preach unto men[88] the prayse of their Makers Wisedome, Power, and Goodnesse, who feedes them and their young ones Summer and Winter with their several sorts of Foode: although they neither sow nor reape, nor gather into Barnes?

How sweetly do all the different types of birds across the world teach people[88] about the praise of their Creator's wisdom, power, and goodness, who feeds them and their young ones summer and winter with all kinds of food, even though they neither sow nor reap, nor gather into barns?

More particularly:

Specifically:

If Birds that neither sow nor reape
Nor store up any food,
Constantly find to them and theirs
A maker kind and good!
If Man provide eke for his Birds,
In Yard, in Coops, in Cage.
And each Bird spends in songs and Tunes,
His little time and Age!
What care will Man, what care will God
For’s wife and children take?
Millions of Birds and Worlds will God
Sooner than his, forsake.

[89]

[89]

CHAP. XVI.

Of the Earth, and the Fruits thereof, &c.

Aûke, and Earth or Land.
Sanaukamuck,
Níttauke, My Land.
Nissawnâwkamuck,
Wuskâukamuck, New ground.
Aquegunnítteash, Fields worne out.
Mìntúck-quash, Trees.
Pauchautaqunnêsash, Branch, Branches.
Wunnèpog-guash, Leafe, leaves.
Wattáp, A roote of Tree.
Séip, A River.
Toyùsk, A bridge.
Sepoêse, A little River.
Sepoêmese, A little Rivulet.
Takèkum, A Spring.
Takekummûo? Is there a Spring.
Sepûo, Is there a River.
Toyusquanûo, Is there a Bridge.

Obs: The Natives are very exact and punctuall in the bounds of their Lands, belonging to this or that Prince or People, (even to a River, Brooke,) &c. And I have knowne them make bargaine and sale amongst themselves for a small piece, or quantity of Ground: notwithstanding a sinfull opinion amongst many that Christians have right to Heathens Lands: but of the delusion of that phrase, I have spoke in a discourse concerning the Indians Conversion.

Obs: The Natives are very precise and punctual about the boundaries of their land, belonging to this or that prince or people, (even down to a river or stream,) etc. I've seen them trade and sell among themselves for a small piece or amount of land: despite a misguided belief among many that Christians have rights to the lands of non-Christians: but regarding the fallacy of that idea, I've discussed it in a discourse on the conversion of the Indians.

Paugáutemisk, An Oake.
Wómpimish, A Chesnut Tree.
Wómpimineash, Chesnutts.

[90]

[90]

Obs: The Indians have an Art of drying their chesnuts, and so to preserve them in their barnes for a daintie all the yeare.

Obs: The Indians have a method for drying their chestnuts, allowing them to store them in their barns as a treat all year round.

Anáuchemineash, Akornes.

These Akornes also they drie, and in case of want of Corne, by much boyling they make a good dish of them: yea sometimes in plentie of Corne doe they eate these Acornes for a novelty.

These acorns are also dried, and in case of a shortage of grain, they make a good dish by boiling them a lot; yes, sometimes when there is plenty of grain, they eat these acorns as a novelty.

Wússoquat, A Wallnut Tree.
Wusswaquatómineug, Wallnut.

Of these Wallnuts they make an excellent Oyle good for many uses, but especially for their anoynting of their heads. And of the chips of the Walnut Tree (the barke taken off) some English in the Countrey make excellent Beere both for Tast, strength, colour, and inoffensive opening operation:

Of these walnuts, they make an excellent oil that’s good for many uses, especially for anointing their heads. And from the chips of the walnut tree (after the bark is removed), some English people in the country make excellent beer, both for taste, strength, color, and its mild opening effects.

Sasaunckpâmuck, The Sassafrasse Tree.
Mishquáwtuck, The Cedar Tree.
Cówaw-ésuck, Pine, young Pine.
Wenomesíppaguash, The Vine-Tree.
Micúckaskeete, A Medow.
Tataggoskìtuash, A fresh Medow.
Maskituash, Grasse or Hay.
Wékinash-quash, Reed, Reeds.
Manìsimmin, To cut or Mow.
Qussuckomineânug, The Cherry Tree.
Wuttáhimneash, Strawberries.

Obs: This Berry is the wonder of all the Fruits growing naturally in those parts: it is of itselfe Excellent: so that one of the chiefest Doctors of England was wont to say, that God could have made, but God never did make a better Berry: In some parts where the Natives have planted, I have many times seen as many as would fill a good ship within a few miles compasse: The Indians bruise them in a Morter, and mixe them with meale and make Strawberry bread.

Obs: This berry is the best of all the fruits that grow naturally in that region. It’s truly exceptional. One of the top doctors in England used to say that while God could have made a better berry, He never did. In some places where the locals have planted them, I've often seen enough berries to fill a decent-sized ship within a few miles. The Native Americans mash them in a mortar, mix them with flour, and make strawberry bread.

Wuchipoquámeneash, A kind of sharp fruit like a Barbary in tast.

Sasémineash, another excellent sharp cooling Fruit growing in fresh waters all the winter, Excellent in conserve against Feavers.

Sasémineash, another great refreshing fruit that grows in freshwater all winter, is excellent in preserves for fighting fevers.

[91]

[91]

Wenómeneash, Grapes.
Wuttahimnasíppaguash, Strawberry leaves.
Peshaûiuash, Violet leaves.
Nummoúwinneem, I goe to gather.
Mowinnee-aûog, He or they gather.
Atáuntowash, Clime the Tree.
Ntáuntawem, I clime.
Punnoûwash, Come downe.
Npunnowaûmen, I come downe.
Attitáash, Hurtle-berries,

Of which there are divers sorts sweete like Currants, some opening, some of a binding nature.

Of which there are different kinds sweet like currants, some that are light and airy, and some that have a more binding quality.

Saûtaash are these Currants dried by the Natives, and so preserved all the yeare, which they beat to powder, and mingle it with their parcht meale, and make a delicate dish which they call Sautáuthig; which is as sweet to them as plum or spice cake to the English.

Saûtaash are these currants dried by the locals, and preserved all year long. They crush them into powder and mix it with their roasted meal to create a tasty dish they call Sautáuthig; it's as sweet to them as plum or spice cake is to the English.

They also make great use of their Strawberries having such abundance of them: making Strawberry bread, and having no other Food for many dayes, but the English have exceeded, and made good Wine both of their Grapes and Strawberries in some places, as I have often tasted.

They also take full advantage of their strawberries since they have so many of them: making strawberry bread and having no other food for many days, but the English have gone further and made good wine from both their grapes and strawberries in some places, as I have often tasted.

Ewáchim neash, Corne.
Scannémeneash, Seed Corne.
Wompiscannémeneash, White seed-corne.

Obs: There be diverse sorts of this Corne, and of the colours: yet all of it either boild in milke, or buttered, if the use of it were knowne and received in England (it is the opinion of some skillfull in physic) it might save many thousand lives in England, occasioned by the binding nature of the English wheat, the Indian Corne keeping the body in a constant moderate loosenesse.

Obs: There are various types of this corn, and of different colors; however, all of it should either be boiled in milk or buttered. If its benefits were understood and accepted in England (according to some knowledgeable in medicine), it could save many thousands of lives in England, caused by the constipating nature of the English wheat, while Indian corn keeps the body consistently moderately loose.

Aukeeteaûmen, To plant Corne.
Quttáunemun, To plant Corne.
Anakáusu, A Labourer.
Anakáusichick, Labourers.
Aukeeteaûmitch, Planting time.
Aukeeteáhettit, When they set Corne.
Nummautaukeeteaûmen,[92] I have done planting.
Anaskhómmin, To how or break up.

Obs: The Women set or plant, weede, and hill, and gather and barne all the corne and Fruites of the Field: yet sometimes the man himselfe, (either out of love to his Wife, or care for his Children, or being an old man) will help the Woman which (by the custome of the Countrey) they are not bound to.

Obs: The women set or plant, weed, and mound, and gather and store all the corn and fruits from the field. Yet sometimes the man himself, either out of love for his wife, concern for his children, or being an older man, will help the woman, which (by the customs of the country) they are not obligated to do.

When a field is to be broken up, they have a very loving sociable speedy way to dispatch it: All the neighbours men and Women forty, fifty, a hundred, &c. joyne, and come in to helpe freely. With friendly joyning they breake up their fields, build their Forts, hunt the woods, stop and kill fish in the Rivers, it being true with them as in all the World in the Affaires of Earth or Heaven: By concord little things grow great, by discord the greatest come to nothing. Concordiâ parvæ res crescunt, discordiâ magnæ dilabuntur.

When a field needs to be cultivated, the neighbors—men and women, forty, fifty, or more—join together enthusiastically to help out. With a spirit of teamwork, they plow the fields, build their shelters, hunt in the woods, and fish in the rivers. It's a truth recognized everywhere, whether in earthly matters or heavenly ones: through unity, small things can grow large, while through discord, the greatest things can fall apart. Concordiâ parvæ res crescunt, discordiâ magnâ dilabuntur.

Anáskhig-anash, How, Howes.
Anaskhómwock, They how.
Anaskhommonteâmin, They break for me.
Anaskhomwáutowwin, A breaking up How.

The Indian women to this day (notwithstanding our Howes), doe use their naturall Howes of shells and Wood.

The Indian women still use their traditional bowls made of shells and wood.

Monaskúnnemun, To weede.
Monaskunnummaûtowwin, A weeding or broad How.
Petascúnnemun, To hill the Corne.
Kepenúmmin, & To gather Corne.
Wuttúnnemun,
Núnnowwa, Harvest time.
Anoûant, At harvest.
Wuttùunemitch, When harvest is in.
Ewáchim,
Pausinnummin, To dry the corne.

Which they doe carefully upon heaps and Mats many dayes, before they barne it up, covering it up with Mats at night, and open it when the Sun is hot.

Which they do carefully on piles and mats many days before they burn it up, covering it with mats at night and uncovering it when the sun is hot.

Sókenug, A heap of corne.

[93]

[93]

Obs: The women of the Family will commonly raise two or three heaps of twelve, fifteene, or twentie bushells a heap, which they drie in round broad heaps; and if she have helpe of her children or friends much more.

Obs: The women of the family will typically gather two or three piles of twelve, fifteen, or twenty bushels each, which they dry in wide, round heaps; and if they have help from their children or friends, even more.

Pockhómmin, To beat or thrash out.
Npockhómmin, I am threshing.
Cuppockhómmin? Doe you thrash?
Wuskockkamuckómeneash, New ground Corne.
Nquitawánnanash, One basket full.
Munnòte, tash, Basket, Baskets.
Máûseck, A great one.
Peewâsick, A little one.
Wussaumepewâsick, Too little.
Pokowánnanash, Halfe a basket full.
Neesowannanash, Two baskets full.
Shéanash, Three.
Yowanannash, Foure, &c.
Aníttash, Rotten corne.
Wawéekanash, Sweet corne.
Tawhìtch quitchemáuntamen? Why doe you smell to it?
Auqúnnash, Barnes.
Necawnáuquanash, Old barnes.

Askútasquash, their Vine apple.—Which the English from them call Squashes about the bignesse of Apples of severall colours, a sweet, light, wholesome refreshing.

Askútasquash, their Vine apple.—Which the English call Squashes, about the size of apples of various colors, sweet, light, wholesome, and refreshing.

Uippakumíneash, The seed of them.

The Observation generall of the Fruits of the Earth.

God hath not left himselfe without wit in all parts and coasts of the world; the raines and fruitfull seasons, the Earth, Trees, Plants, &c. filling mans heart with food and gladnesse, witnesseth against and condemneth man for his unthankfullnesse and unfruitfullnesse towards his Maker.

God has not left Himself without evidence in all parts and regions of the world; the rains and fruitful seasons, the Earth, trees, plants, etc., fill human hearts with food and joy, standing as a witness against and condemning humanity for its ungratefulness and unfruitfulness towards its Creator.

More particular.

More specific.

Yeeres thousands since, God gave command
(As we in Scripture find)
That Earth, and Trees and Plants should bring[94]
Forth fruit each in his kind.
The wildernesse remembers this
The wild and howling land
Answers the toyling labour of,
The wildest Indians hand.
But Man forgets his Maker, who,
Fram’d him in Righteousnesse.
A paradise in Paradise, now worse
Than Indian wildernesse.

[95]

[95]

CHAP. XVII.

Of Beasts, &c.

Penashímwock, Beasts.
Netasûog, Cattell.

Obs: This name the Indians give to tame Beasts, yea, and birds also which they keepe tame about their houses.

Obs: This is the name the Indians use for domesticated animals, including birds, that they keep around their homes.

Muckquashím-wock, Wolves.
Moattôqus, A blacke Wolfe.
Tummòckquaûog, } Beaver, Beavers.
Nóosuppaûog, Please provide a short piece of text for me to modernize.
Súmhuppaûog, Beaver, Beavers.

Obs: This is a beast of wonder; for cutting and drawing of great pieces of trees with his teeth, with which and sticks and earth I have often seen, fair streams and rivers damm’d and stopt up by them: upon these streames thus damm’d up, he builds his house with stories, wherein he sits drie in his chambers, or goes into the water at his pleasure.

Obs: This is an amazing creature; it uses its teeth to cut and drag large pieces of wood and sticks, and I've often seen it blocking streams and rivers. On these dammed-up streams, it builds its home with multiple levels, where it stays dry in its chambers or goes into the water whenever it wants.

Mishquáshim, A red Fox.
Pequawus, A gray Fox.

Obs: The Indians say they have black Foxes which they have often seen, but never could take any of them: they say they are Manittóoes, that is, Gods; Spirits or Divine powers, as they say of every thing which they cannot comprehend.

Obs: The Indians say they have black foxes which they have often seen, but have never been able to catch any of them: they say they are Manittóoes, which means Gods; Spirits or Divine powers, as they refer to everything that they cannot understand.

Aûsup-pánuog, Racoone, Racoones.
Nkéke, nkéquock, Otter, Otters.
Pussoúgh, The wildcat.

Ockqutchaun-nug, A wild beast of a reddish haire about the bignesse of a Pig, and rooting like a Pig; from whence they give this name to all our Swine.

Ockqutchaun-nug, a wild beast with reddish fur, about the size of a Pig, and rooting like a Pig; that's where they get this name for all our pigs.

Mishánneke-quock, Squirrell, Squirrils.
Anéqusanéquussuck, A little coloured Squirril
Waûtuiiques, The Conck.

[96]

[96]

Obs: They have a reverend esteeme of this Creature, and conceive there is some Deitie in it.

Obs: They hold this creature in high regard and believe there’s something divine about it.

Attuck, quock, } Deere.
Nóonatch noónatchaug,  }
Moósquin, A Fawn.
Wawwúnnes, A young Bucke.
Kuttíomp & Paucottâuwaw, A great Bucke.
Aunàn-quunèke, A Doe.
Qunnequáwese, A little young Doe.
Naynayoûmewot, A Horse.
Côwsnuck, Cowes.
Gôatesuck, Goates.
Hógsuck,
Pìgsuck, Swine.

Obs: This Termination suck, is common in their language and therefore they adde it to our English Cattell, not else knowing what names to give them;

Obs: This Termination suck is common in their language, and that's why they added it to our English. Cattell, not knowing what other names to use, did so.

Anùm, A Dog.

Yet the varietie of their Dialects and proper speech within thirtie or fortie miles each of other, is very great, as appears in that word.

Yet the variety of their dialects and language within thirty or forty miles of each other is very distinct, as seen in that word.

Anùm, The Cowweset. }
Ayím, The Narriganset. }     Dialect.
Arúm, The Qunnippiuck. }
Alùm, The Neepmuck. }

So that although some pronounce not L, nor R, yet it is the most proper Dialect of other places, contrary to many reports.

So even though some people don't pronounce L or R, it's still the most proper dialect in other places, despite what many say.

Enewáshim, A Male.
Squáshim, A Female.
Moòs-sóog, The great Oxe, or rather a red Deere.
Askùg, A Snake.
Móaskug, Black Snake.
Sések, Rattle Snake.
Natúppwock, They feed.
Téaqua natuphéttit? What shall they eat?
Natuphéttitch yo sanaukamick, Let them feed on this ground.

The generall Observation of the Beasts.

The Wildernesse, is a cleere resemblance of the[97] world, where gredie and furious men persecute and devoure the harmlesse and innocent as the wilde beasts pursue and devoure the Hinds and Roes.

The wilderness is a clear reflection of the[97] world, where greedy and violent people chase after and destroy the harmless and innocent, just like wild animals hunt and consume the hinds and roes.

More particular.

More specific.

1. The Indians, Wolves, yea, Dogs and Swine
I have knowne the Deere devoure,
Gods children are sweet prey to all;
But yet the end proves sowre.
2. For though Gods children lose their lives,
They shall not loose an haire;
But shall arise, and judge all those,
That now their Judges are.
3. New-England’s wilde beasts are not fierce
As other wild beasts are:
Some men are not so fierce, and yet
From mildnesse are they farre.

[98]

[98]

CHAP. XVIII.

Of the Sea.

Wechêkum, } The Sea.
Kítthan, }

Paumpágussit, the Sea-God, or that name which they give that Deitie or Godhead which they conceive to be in the Sea.

Paumpágussit, the Sea God, or the name they give to the deity or divine presence they believe exists in the sea.

Obs: Mishoòn, an Indian Boat, or Canow made of a Pine or Oake, or Chesnut-tree: I have seene a Native goe into the woods with his hatchet carrying onely a Basket of Corne with him, and stones to strike fire when he had felled his tree (being a Chesnut) he made him a little House or shed of the bark of it, he puts fire and followes the burning of it with fire, in the midst in many places: his corne he boyles and hath the Brook by him, and sometimes angles for a little fish: but so hee continues burning and hewing untill he hath within ten or twelve dayes (lying there at his worke alone) finished, and (getting hands,) lanched his Boate; with which afterward hee ventures out to fish in the Ocean.

Obs: Mishoòn, an Indian boat or canoe made from pine, oak, or chestnut wood. I've seen a native go into the woods with just his hatchet, carrying only a basket of corn and some stones to start a fire. After he cuts down a chestnut tree, he builds a small house or shelter from the bark. He starts a fire and manages it in several places while boiling his corn and using the nearby brook to occasionally fish. He keeps burning and chopping until, in about ten to twelve days (working alone), he finishes and launches his boat; then he ventures out to fish in the ocean.

Mishoonémese, A little Canow.

Some of them will not well carry above three or foure: but some of them twenty, thirty, forty men.

Some of them won’t handle more than three or four, but some of them can support twenty, thirty, or even forty men.

Wunnauanoûnuck, A shallop.
Wunnauanounuckquèse, A skiffe.

Obs: Although themselves have neither, yet they give them such names, which in their Language signifieth carrying Vessells.

Obs: Although they don't have either, they still give them names that in their language mean carrying vessels.

Kitônuck, A Ship.
Kitónuckquese, A little Ship.
Mishíttouwand, A great Canow.
Peeswàsu, A little one.
Paugautemissaûnd, An Oake Canow
Kowawwawaûnd, A pine Canow.
Wompmissaûnd, A chesnut Canow.
Ogwhan,[99] A boat adrift.
Wuskon-tógwhan, It will goe adrift.
Cuttunnamíinnea, Help me to Launch.
Cuttunnummútta, Let us launch.
Cuttúnnamoke, Launch.
Cuttánnummous, I will help you.
Wútkunck, A paddle or Oare.
Namacóuche cómishoon, Lend me your Boate.
Paûtousnenótehunck, Bring hither my paddle.
Comishoónhom? Goe you by water?
Chémosh-chémeck, Paddle or row.
Maumínikish and Pull up, or row lustily.
Maumanetepweéas,
Sepâkehig, A Sayle.
Sepagehommaûta, Let us saile.
Wunnâgehan, We have a faire wind.

Obs: Their owne reason hath taught them, to pull off a Coat or two and set it up on a small pole, with which they will saile before a wind ten, or twenty mile &c.

Obs: Their own reasoning has taught them to take off a coat or two and set it up on a small pole, with which they will sail before a wind at ten or twenty miles, etc.

Wauaúpunish, Hoyse up.
Wuttáutnish, Pull to you.
Nókanish, Take it downe.
Pakétenish, Let goe or let flie.
Nikkoshkowwaûmen, We shall be drown’d.
Nquawu pshâwmen, We overset.
Wussaûme pechepaûsha, The sea comes in too fast upon us.
Maumaneeteántass, Be of good courage.

Obs: It is wonderfull to see how they will venture in those Canoes, and how (being oft overset as I have myselfe been with them) they will swim a mile, yea two or more safe to Land: I having been necessitated to passe Waters diverse times: with them, it hath pleased God to make them many times the instruments of my preservation; and when sometimes in great danger I have questioned safety, they have said to me: Feare not, if we be overset I will carry you safe to Land.

Obs: It's amazing to see how they venture out in those canoes, and how, even after capsizing like I have a few times, they can swim a mile, or even two or more, safely to shore. I've had to cross waters many times: it has pleased God to use them as instruments of my survival on several occasions; and when I've been in great danger and questioned my safety, they have told me: Don't worry, if we capsize, I'll get you safely to shore.

Paupaútuckquash, Hold water.
Kínnequass, Steere.
Tiáckomme kínniquass,[100] Steere right.
Kunnósnep, A Killick, or Anchor.
Chowwophómmin, To cast over-board.
Chouwóphash, Cast over-board.
Touwopskhómmke, Cast anchor.
Mishittashin, It is a storme.
Awêpesha, It caulmes.
Awêpu, A calme.
Nanoúwashin, A great caulme.
Tamóccon, Floud.
Nanashowetamóccon, Halfe Floud.
Keesaqúshin, High water.
Taumacoks, Upon the Floud.
Mishittommóckon, A great Floud.
Maùchetan and skàt, Ebb.
Mittâeskat, A low Ebb.
Awánick Paûdhuck? Who comes there?

Obs: I have knowne thirty or forty of their Canowes fill’d with Men, and neere as many more of their enemies in a Sea fight.

Obs: I have seen thirty or forty of their canoes filled with men, and nearly as many more of their enemies in a sea fight.

Caupaûshess, Goe ashoare.
Caupaushâuta, Let us goe ashoare.
Wusséheposh, Heave out the water.
Asképunish, Make fast the Boat.
Kspúnsh & Kspúnemoke, Tie it fast.
Maumínikish, Tie it hard.
Neene Cuthómwock, Now they goe off.
Kekuthomwushánnick, They are gone already.

Generall Observations of the Sea.

How unsearchable are the depths of the Wisedome and Power of God in separating from Europe, Asia and Africa such a mightie vast continent as America is? and that for so many ages? as also, by such a Westerne Ocean of about three thousand of English miles breadth in passage over?

How unfathomable are the depths of God's wisdom and power in separating such a vast continent as America from Europe, Asia, and Africa for so many ages? And that with such a Western Ocean that spans about three thousand English miles to cross?

More particular:

More specific:

They see God’s wonders that are call’d
Through dreadfull Seas to passe,
In tearing winds, and roaring seas,
And calmes as smooth as glasse.
[101]
I have in Europes ships, oft been
In King of terrours hand;
When all have cri’d, Now, now we sinck,
Yet God brought safe to land.
Alone ’mongst Indians in Canoes,
Sometime o’return’d, I have been
Halfe inch from death, in Ocean deepe,
Gods wonders I have seene.

[102]

[102]

CHAP. XIX.

Of Fish and Fishing.

Namaùus,-suck, Fish, Fishes.
Your input seems to have no phrases for me to modernize. Please provide a short piece of text for assistance. Cod, Which is the first that comes a little before the Spring.
Pauganaùt, tamwock,      }
}
} Lampries, The first that come in the Spring into the fresh Rivers.
Qunnamáug-suck,   }
I'm sorry, but I don't see any text provided to modernize. Please provide the text you'd like me to work on.
Aumsûog, & Munnaw-hatteaûg, A Fish somewhat like a Herring.
Missúckeke-kéquock, Basse.

The Indians (and the English too) make a daintie dish of the Uppaquontup, or head of this Fish; and well they may, the braines and fat of it being very much, and sweet as marrow.

The Indians (and the English too) make a delicacy out of the Uppaquontup, or head of this fish; and it's no surprise, as its brains and fat are quite abundant and as sweet as marrow.

Kaúposh-shaûoog, Sturgeon.

Obs: Divers part of the Countrey abound with this Fish; yet the Natives for the goodnesse and greatnesse of it, much prize it, and will neither furnish the English with so many, nor so cheape, that any great trade is like to be made of it, untill the English themselves are fit to follow the fishing.

Obs: Various parts of the country are full of this fish; however, the locals really value it for its quality and size, and they won’t provide the English with many or at low prices, so no significant trade is likely to happen until the English are ready to do the fishing themselves.

The Natives venture one or two in a Canow, and with an harping Iron, or such like Instrument sticke this fish, and so hale it into their Canow; sometimes they take them by their nets, which they make strong of Hemp.

The Natives go out one or two at a time in a canoe, and with a harpoon or a similar tool, they spear the fish and pull it into their canoe; sometimes, they catch them with nets they make from strong hemp.

Ashòp, their nets. Which they will set thwart some little River or Cove wherein they kill Basse (at the fall of the water) with their arrows, or sharp sticks, especially if headed with Iron, gotten from the English, &c.

Ashòp, their nets. They’ll use them across some small river or cove where they catch bass (at the waterfall) with their arrows or sharp sticks, especially if they have iron tips obtained from the English, etc.

Aucùp, A little Cove or Creeke.
Aucppâwese,[103] A very little one.
Wawwhunnekesûog, Mackrell.
Mishquammaùquock, Red fish, Salmon.
Osacóntuck, A fat sweet fish, something like a Haddock.
Mishcùp-paûog, Breame.
Sequanamáuquock,

Obs: Of this Fish there is abundance, which the Natives drie in the Sunne and smoake; and some English begin to salt, both wayes they keepe all the yeere; and it is hoped it may be as well accepted as Cod at a Market, and better, if once knowne.

Obs: There is plenty of this fish, which the natives dry in the sun and smoke; and some English people have started to salt it. Both methods allow them to keep it all year round. It’s hoped that it could be as popular as cod at a market, and even better once people are aware of it.

Taut-aúog, Sheeps-heads.
Neeshaúog, }
Sassammaúquock,   } Eeles.
Nquittéconnaúog,    }
Tatackommmâúog, Porpuses.
Pútop-paúog, Whales.

Which in some places are often cast up; I have seene some of them, but not above sixtie foot long: The Natives cut them out in severall parcells, and give and send farre and neere for an acceptable present, or dish.

Which in some places are often found; I have seen some of them, but not more than sixty feet long: The locals cut them into various pieces and give and send them far and wide as a nice gift or dish.

Missêsu, The whole.
Poquêsu, The halfe.
Waskèke, The Whalebone.
Wussúckqun, A taile.
Aumaûog, They are fishing.
Ntaûmen, I am fishing.
Kuttaûmen? Doe you fish?
Nnattuckqunnûwem, I goe a fishing.
Aumáchick, } Fishes.
Natuckqunnuwâchick,  }
Aumaûi, He is gone to fish.
Awácenick kukkattineanaûmen? What doe you fish for.
Ashaûnt-teaûg, Lobsters.
Opponenaûhock, Oysters.
Sickíssuog, Clams.

Obs: This is a sweet kind of shellfish, which all Indians generally over the Countrey, Winter and Summer delight in; and at low water the women dig[104] for them: this fish, and the naturall liquors of it, they boile, and it makes their broth and their Nasaúmp (which is a kind of thickened broth) and their bread seasonable and savoury, in stead of Salt: and for that the English Swine dig and root these Clams wheresoever they come, and watch the low water (as the Indian women do) therefore of all the English Cattell, the Swine (as also because of their filthy disposition) are most hatefull to all Natives, and they call them filthy cut throats, &c.

Obs: This is a sweet kind of shellfish that all Indians across the country enjoy, both in winter and summer. At low tide, the women dig for them. They boil this fish and its natural juices, which makes their broth and their Nasaúmp (a type of thickened broth) and their bread flavorful and tasty, serving as a substitute for salt. Because of this, English pigs dig up these clams wherever they go, watching for low tide just like the Indian women do. For this reason, of all the English livestock, the pigs (also due to their filthy habits) are the most detested by all natives, who refer to them as filthy cutthroats, etc.

Séqunnock, } A Horse fish.
Poquaûhock, Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.

Obs: This the English call Hens, a little thick shell fish which the Indians wade deepe and dive for, and after they have eaten the meat there (in those which are good) they breake out of the shell, about halfe an inch of a blacke part of it, of which they make their Suckaúhock, or blackmoney, which is to them pretious.

Obs: This is what the English call Hens, a small shellfish with a somewhat thick shell that the Indians wade deep into the water and dive for. After they eat the good meat inside, they break off about half an inch of a black part of the shell, which they use to make their Suckaúhock, or black money, which is valuable to them.

Meteaûhock, The Periwinkle.

Of which they make their Wómpan or white money, of halfe the value of their Suckáwhock, or blacke money, of which more in the Chapter of their Coyne.

Of which they make their Wómpan or white money, of half the value of their Suckáwhock, or black money, of which more in the Chapter of their Coyne.

Cumménakiss, }
Cummenakíssamen, } Have you taken store?
Cummuchickinneanâwmen? }
Numménakiss, I have taken store.
Nummuchikineanâwmen, I have killed many.
Machàge, I have caught none.
Aúmanep, A fishing line.
Aumanapeash, Lines.

The Natives take exceeding great paines in their fishing, especially in watching their seasons by night; so that frequently they lay their naked bodies many a cold night on the cold shoare about a fire of two or three sticks, and oft in the night search their Nets; and sometimes goe in and stay longer in frozen water.

The Natives put in a lot of hard work when it comes to fishing, especially by keeping an eye on the seasons at night. They often spend many cold nights lying on the chilly shore near a fire made of just a couple of sticks, and they frequently check their nets throughout the night. Sometimes, they even go into the freezing water and stay longer than you'd expect.

Hoquaùn aûnash, Hooke, hookes.
Peewâsicks, Little hookes.
Maúmacocks, Great hookes.
Nponamouôog, I set nets for them.
Npunnouwaûmen,[105] I goe to search my nets.
Mihtúckquashep, An Eele-pot.
Kunnagqunneûteg, A greater sort.
Onawangónnakaun, A baite.
Yo onawangónnatees, Baite with this.
} A little sort of fish, halfe as big as Sprats, plentifull in Winter.
Moamitteaúg,}
}
Paponaumsúog, A winter fish, which comes up in the brookes and rivulets;

some call them Frost fish, from their comming up from the Sea into fresh Brookes, in times of frost and snow.

some call them Frost fish, because they come up from the sea into fresh brooks during times of frost and snow.

Qunôsuog, A fresh fish,

which the Indians break the ice in fresh ponds, when they take also many other sorts: for, to my knowledge the Country yeelds many sorts of other fish, which I mention not.

which the Indians break the ice in new ponds, when they also catch various other types: because, to my knowledge, the country provides many kinds of other fish that I don't mention.

The generall Observation of Fish.

How many thousands of Millions of those under water, sea inhabitants, in all Coasts of the world, preach to the sonnes of men on shore, to adore their glorious Maker, by presenting themselves to Him as themselves (in a manner) present their lives from the wild Ocean, to the very doores of men, their fellow creatures in New-England.

How many thousands of millions of those underwater, sea creatures, along all the coasts of the world, urge the sons of men on shore to worship their glorious Creator, by showing themselves as they bring their lives from the wild ocean to the very doors of men, their fellow beings in New England.

More particular.

More specific.

What Habacuck once spake, mine eyes
Have often seene most true,
The greater Fishes devoure the lesse,
And cruelly pursue.
Forcing them through coves and creekes
To leape on driest sand,
To gaspe on earthie element, or die
By wildest Indians hand.
Christs little ones must hunted be
Devour’d; yet rise as Hee.
And eate up those which now a while
Their fierce devourers be.

[106]

[106]

CHAP. XX.

Of their Nakednesse and Clothing.

Paúskesu, Naked.
Pauskesítchck, Naked men and women.
Nippóskíss, I am naked.

They have a two-fold nakednesse:

They have a two-fold nakedness:

First, ordinary and constant, when although they have a Beasts skin, or an English mantle on, yet that covers ordinarily but their hinder parts and all the foreparts from top to toe, (except their secret parts, covered with a little Apron, after the patterne of their and our first Parents) I say all else open and naked.

First, ordinary and constant, even though they have an animal skin or an English cloak on, it usually only covers their back parts, while the front parts are exposed from top to bottom, except for their private areas, which are covered with a small apron, similar to what our first parents wore. I mean everything else is open and naked.

Their male children goe starke naked, and have no Apron untill they come to ten or twelve yeers of age; their Female they, in a modest blush cover with a little Apron of an hand breadth from their very birth. Their second nakednesse is when their men often abroad and both men and women within doores, leave off their beasts skin, or English cloth and so (excepting their little apron) are wholly naked; yet but few of the women but will keepe their skin or cloth (though loose) or neare to them ready to gather it up about them.

Their male children run around completely naked and don’t wear an apron until they’re about ten or twelve years old. For their female children, they modestly cover them with a small apron that's about the width of a hand from birth. Their second state of nudity happens when the men are often outside and both men and women indoors take off their animal skins or English cloth and thus (except for their little aprons) are fully naked; yet, very few of the women don’t keep their skins or cloth (even if it's loose) nearby, ready to grab it and wrap it around themselves.

Custome hath used their minds and bodies to it, and in such a freedom from any wantonnesse, that I have never seen that wantonnesse amongst them, as, (with griefe) I have heard of in Europe.

Custom has shaped their minds and bodies to it, and in such freedom from any lewdness, that I have never witnessed that lewdness among them, as I have (with sadness) heard of in Europe.

Nippóskenitch, I am rob’d of my coat.
Nippóskenick ewò, He takes away my Coat.
Acòh, Their Deere skin.
Tummóckquashunck, A Beavers coat.
Nkéquashunck, An Otters coat.
Mohéwonck, A Rakoone-skin coat.
Natóquashunch, A Wolves-skin coat.
Mishannéquashunck,[107] A Squirril-skin coat.
Neyhommaûashunck, a coat or Mantle,

curiously made of the fairest feathers of their Neyhommaûog or Turkies, which commonly their old Men make; and is with them as velvet with us.

curiously made of the finest feathers from their Neyhommaûog or turkeys, which their elders usually create; and it is for them what velvet is for us.

Maúnek: nquittiashíagat, An English Coat or Mantell.
Cáudnish, Put off.
Ocquash, Put on.
Neesashíagat, Two coats.
Shwíshiagat, Three coats.
Piuckquashiágat, Ten coats, &c.

Obs: Within their skin or coat they creepe contentedly, by day or night, in house, or in the woods, and sleep soundly, counting it a felicitie, (as indeed an earthly one it is;) Intra pelliculam quemque tenere suam, That every man be content with his skin.

Obs: They creep comfortably within their skin or coat, day or night, in the house or in the woods, and sleep peacefully, considering it a blessing, (which it truly is in this world); Intra pelliculam quemque tenere suam, That everyone should be content with their own skin.

Squáus aúhaqut, A Womans Mantle.
Muckíis auhaqut, A childs Mantle.
Pétacaus, An English Wastecoat.
Petacawsunnése, A little wastecoat.
Aûtah & aútawhun, Their apron.
Caukóanash, Stockins.
Nquittetiagáttash, A paire of stockins.
Mocússinass, &
Mockussinchass, Shooes.

Obs: Both these, Shoes and Stockins they make of their Deere skin worne out; which yet being excellently tann’d by them, is excellent for to travell in wet and snow; for it is so well tempered with oyle, that the water cleane wrings out; and being hang’d up in their chimney, they presently drie without hurt as myselfe hath often proved.

Obs: Both shoes and stockings are made from the deer skin they use. Since it’s really well tanned by them, it's great for traveling in wet and snowy conditions because it’s treated with oil so well that the water just wipes right off. And when they hang it up by the fireplace, it dries quickly without any damage, as I have often experienced myself.

Noonacominash, Too little.
Taubacóminash, Big enough.
Saunketíppo, or, Ashónaquo, A hat or Cap.
I'm sorry, but there is no text provided to modernize. Please provide a phrase for me to work on. The skin of a great beast as big as an Ox, some call it a red Deere.
Moôse,Please provide the text you would like modernized.
}
Wussuckhósu, Painted.

They also commonly paint these Moose and Deere[108] skins for their Summer wearing, with varietie of formes and colours.

They often paint these moose and deer[108] skins for summer wear, using a variety of shapes and colors.

Petouwássinug, Their Tobacco-bag,

which hangs at their necke, or sticks at their girdle, which is to them instead of an English pocket.

which hangs around their neck or is attached to their belt, which serves as their version of an English pocket.

Obs: Our English clothes are so strange unto them, and their bodies inured so to endure the weather, that when (upon gift &c.) some of them have had English cloathes, yet in a showre of raine, I have seen them rather expose their skins to the wet, than their cloaths, and therefore pull them off, and keep them drie.

Obs: Our English clothes are so strange to them, and their bodies are so used to enduring the weather, that when they have received some English clothes as gifts, I've seen them prefer to expose their skin to the rain rather than get their clothes wet. They would take them off to keep them dry.

Obs: While they are amongst the English they keep on the English apparell, but pull off all, as soone as they come againe into their owne Houses, and Company.

Obs: While they are among the English, they wear English clothes, but take them off as soon as they return to their own homes and company.

Generall Observations of their Garments.

How deep are the purposes and Councells of God? What should bee the reason of this mighty difference of One mans children that all the Sonnes of men on this side the way (in Europe, Asia and Africa,) should have such plenteous clothing for Body, for soule! and the rest of Adams sonnes and Daughters on the other side, or America (some thinke as big as the other three,) should neither have nor desire clothing for their naked Soules, or Bodies.

How deep are God's purposes and plans? What could explain this huge difference where one man's children have abundant clothing for their bodies and souls, while the rest of humanity on this side of the world (in Europe, Asia, and Africa) has so much, yet the other side, or America (which some think is as large as the other three), lacks both clothing for their naked bodies and souls, or even the desire for it?

More particular:

More specific:

1. O what a Tyrant’s custome long,
How doe men make a push,
At what’s in use, though ne’re so fowle,
Without once shame or blush?
2. Many thousand proper Men and Women,
I have seen met in one place:
Almost all naked, yet not one,
Thought want of clothes disgrace.
3. Israell was naked, wearing clothes! }
The best clad English-man, }
Not cloth’d with Christ, more naked is    } Ex. 32.
Than naked Indian. }

[109]

[109]

CHAP. XXI.

Of Religion, the Soule, &c.

Manìt-manittówock, God, Gods.

Obs: He that questions whether God made the World, the Indians will teach him. I must acknowledge I have received in my converse with them, many Confirmations of those two great points, Heb. 11. 6. viz:

Obs: If someone questions whether God created the World, the Indians will show him. I must admit that in my interactions with them, I have gained many confirmations of those two important points, Heb. 11. 6. viz:

1. That God is.

That’s what God is.

2. That hee is a rewarder of all them that diligently seek him.

2. He rewards everyone who earnestly seeks Him.

They will generally confesse that God made all: but then in speciall, although they deny not that Englishmans God made English Men, and the Heavens and Earth there! yet their Gods made them, and the Heaven, and the Earth where they dwell.

They will generally admit that God created everything: but specifically, while they don't deny that the God of the English made English people, as well as the heavens and the earth, they believe that their own gods created them and the heaven and earth where they live.

Nummus quauna-mùckqun manit, God is angry with me.

Obs: I heard a poore Indian lamenting the losse of a child at break of day, call up his Wife and children, and all about him to Lamentation, and with abundance of teares cry out! O God thou hast taken away my child: thou art angry with me: O turne thine anger from me, and spare the rest of my children.

Obs: I heard a poor Indian mourning the loss of a child at dawn, calling his wife and children around him to grieve, and with overflowing tears cried out! O God, you have taken away my child: you are angry with me: O turn your anger away from me, and spare the rest of my children.

If they receive any good in hunting, fishing, Harvest, &c. they acknowledge God in it.

If they have any success in hunting, fishing, harvesting, etc., they recognize God in it.

Yea, if it be but an ordinary accident, a fall, &c. they will say God was angry and did it.

Yeah, if it's just a regular accident, a fall, etc., they'll say God was angry and caused it.

Musquantum manit, God is angry.

But herein is their Misery.

But here is their misery.

First, they branch their Godhead into many Gods.

First, they split their divinity into multiple gods.

Secondly, attribute it to Creatures.

Secondly, credit it to Creatures.

[110]

[110]

First, many Gods: they have given me the Names of thirty-seven, which I have, all which in their solemne Worships they invocate: as,

First, many gods: they have given me the names of thirty-seven, all of which they invoke in their solemn rituals: as,

Kautántowwit, The great South West God,

to whose House all soules goe, and from whom came their Corne, Beanes, as they say.

to whose house all souls go, and from whom came their corn, beans, as they say.

Wompanànd, The Easterne God.
Chekesuwànd, The Westerne God.
Wunnanaméanit, The Northerne God.
Sowwanànd, The Southerne God.
Wetuómanit, The house God.

Even as the Papists have their He and Shee Saint Protectors as St. George, St. Patrick, St. Dennis, Virgin Mary, &c.

Even though the Catholics have their male and female saint protectors like St. George, St. Patrick, St. Denis, the Virgin Mary, etc.

Squàuanit, The Womans God.
Muckquachuckquànd, The Childrens God.

Obs: I was once with a Native dying of a wound, given him by some of the murtherous English (who rob’d him and run him through with a Rapier,) from whom in the heat of his wound, he at present escaped from them, but dying of his wound, they suffered Death at new Plymouth, in New England, this Native dying call’d much upon Mackquachuckquànd, which of other Natives I understood, (as they believed) had appeared to the dying young man, many yeares before, and bid him whenever he was in distresse call upon him.

Obs: I was once with a Native who was dying from a wound inflicted by some murderous Englishmen (who robbed him and stabbed him with a rapier). He had escaped from them in the heat of his injury, but was dying from the wound. They suffered death at New Plymouth in New England. This Native called out a lot for Mackquachuckquànd, whom I understood from other Natives (as they believed) had appeared to the dying young man many years before and told him to call on him whenever he was in distress.

Secondly, as they have many of these fained Deities: so worship they the Creatures in whom they conceive doth rest some Deitie:

Secondly, since they have many of these feigned deities, they worship the beings in which they believe some divinity resides:

Keesuckquànd, The Sun God.
Nanepaûshat, The Moone God.
Paumpágussit, The Sea.
Yotáanit, The fire God.

Supposing that Deities be in these, &c.

Supposing that gods exist in these, etc.

When I have argued with them about their Fire-God: can it say they be, but this fire must be a God, or Divine power, that out of a stone will arise in a Sparke, and when a poore naked Indian is ready to starve with cold in the House, and especially in the Woods, often saves his life, doth dresse all our Food for us, and if it be angry will burne the House about[111] us, yea if a sparke fall into the drie wood, burnes up the Country, (though this burning of the Wood to them they count a Benefit, both for destroying of vermin, and keeping downe the Weeds and thickets?)

When I've debated with them about their Fire-God: can they really say it's anything but a God, or some Divine power, that can spark to life from a stone? And when a poor, naked Indian is about to freeze in the house, especially in the woods, it often saves his life, cooks all our food for us, and if it’s angry, it will burn the house down around us. And if a spark falls into the dry wood, it can set the entire area on fire, even though they consider this burning of the wood a benefit, since it gets rid of pests and controls the weeds and undergrowth?[111]

Præsentem narrat quælibet herba Deum.

Præsentem narrat quælibet herba Deum.

Every little Grasse doth tell,
The sons of Men, there God doth dwell.

Besides there is a generall Custome amongst them, at the apprehension of any Excellency in Men, Women, Birds, Beasts, Fish, &c. to cry out Manittóo, that is, it is a God, as thus if they see one man excell others in Wisdome, Valour, Strength, Activity &c. they cry out

Besides, there’s a general custom among them that when they notice any excellence in men, women, birds, beasts, fish, etc., they shout out "Manittóo," which means “it’s a God.” For example, if they see a man who excels others in wisdom, bravery, strength, agility, etc., they yell out.

Manittóo, A God.

And therefore when they talke amongst themselves of the English ships, and great buildings, of the plowing of their Fields, and especially of Bookes and Letters, they will end thus: Manittôwock, They are Gods: Cummanittôo, You are a God, &c. A strong Conviction naturall in the soule of man, that God is filling all things, and places, and that all Excellencies dwell in God, and proceed from him, and that they only are blessed who have that Jehovah their portion.

And so when they talk among themselves about the English ships, the big buildings, the farming of their fields, and especially about books and letters, they conclude by saying: Manittôwock, They are gods: Cummanittôo, You are a god, etc. There’s a deep conviction in the human soul that God fills all things and places, that all excellence resides in God and comes from Him, and that they are truly blessed who have Jehovah as their portion.

Nickómmo, A Feast or Dance.

Of this Feast they have publike, and private and that of two sorts.

Of this Feast, they have public and private, and there are two types.

First in sicknesse, or Drouth, or Warre, or Famine.

First in sickness, or drought, or war, or famine.

Secondly, After Harvest, after hunting, when they enjoy a caulme of Peace, Health, Plenty, Prosperity, then Nickómmo, a Feast, especially in Winter, for then (as the Turke saith of the Christian, rather the Antichristian,) they run mad once a yeare in their kind of Christmas feasting.

Secondly, after harvest and hunting, when they enjoy a moment of peace, health, abundance, and prosperity, there’s a celebration called Nickómmo, especially during winter. It’s like how the Turk describes Christians, or rather, anti-Christians—they go a little wild once a year with their version of Christmas feasting.

Powwáw, A Priest.
Powwaûog, Priests.

Obs: These doe begin and order their service, and Invocation of their Gods, and all the people follow, and joyne interchangeably in a laborious bodily service, unto sweating, especially of the Priest, who[112] spends himselfe in strange Antick Gestures, and Actions even unto fainting.

Obs: These women start and carry out their rituals and prayers to their gods, with everyone joining in, engaging together in a physically demanding service until they sweat, especially the priest, who[112] exhausts himself with strange, exaggerated movements and actions to the point of fainting.

In sicknesse the Priest comes close to the sick person, and performes many strange Actions about him, and threatens and conjures out the sicknesse.

In sickness, the priest approaches the sick person and performs various unusual actions around them, threatening and casting out the illness.

They conceive that there are many Gods or divine Powers within the Body of a Man: In his pulse, his heart, his Lungs, &c. I confesse to have most of these their customes by their owne Relation, for after once being in their Houses, and beholding what their Worship was, I durst never be an eye witnesse, Spectatour, or looker on, least I should have been partaker of Sathans Inventions and Worships, contrary to Ephes. 5. 14.

They believe that there are many gods or divine powers within a person's body: in their pulse, heart, lungs, etc. I admit that I learned most of their customs from their own accounts, because after visiting their homes and seeing their worship, I never dared to be an eyewitness, spectator, or onlooker, for fear of being involved in Satan's inventions and worships, contrary to Ephesians 5:14.

Nanouwétea, An over-Seer and Orderer of their Worship.
Neennanowwúnnemun, I will order or oversee.

They have an exact forme of King, Priest, and Prophet, as was in Israel typicall of old in that holy Land of Canaan, and as the Lord Jesus ordained in his spirituall Land of Canaan his Church throughout the whole World: their Kings or Governours called Sachimaûog, Kings and Atauskowaûg Rulers doe govern: Their Priests performe and manage their Worship: Their wise men and old men (of which number their Priests are also,) whom they call Taupowauog they make solemne speeches and Orations, or Lectures to them, concerning Religion, Peace or Warre and all things.

They have a specific role of King, Priest, and Prophet, similar to what existed in ancient Israel in the holy Land of Canaan, and as the Lord Jesus established in His spiritual Land of Canaan, His Church throughout the whole world. Their Kings or Governors, called Sachimaûog, and the Atauskowaûg Rulers govern. Their Priests carry out and oversee their worship. Their wise and elder men (which includes their Priests), called Taupowauog, deliver formal speeches and lectures to them about religion, peace, war, and all other matters.

Nowemasúitteem, I give way at the Worship.

He or she that makes this Nickòmmo Feast or Dance, besides the feasting sometimes twenty, fifty, an hundredth yea I have seene neere a thousand persons at one of these Feasts: they give I say a great quantity of money, and all sort of their goods, (according to and sometimes beyond their Estate) in severall small parcells of goods, or money, to the value of eighteen pence, two Shillings, or thereabouts to one person: and that person that receives this Gift, upon the receiving of it, goes out and hollowes thrice for the health and prosperity of the Party that gave it, the Mr. or Mistris of the Feast.

He or she who hosts this Nickòmmo Feast or Dance, aside from the feasting, sometimes has twenty, fifty, or even close to a thousand people attending one of these events. They give a large amount of money and all kinds of their belongings, sometimes according to or even exceeding their means, in various small packages of goods or cash, each worth about eighteen pence or two shillings. The person who receives this gift, upon getting it, steps outside and shouts three times for the health and prosperity of the host, the master or mistress of the Feast.

[113]

[113]

Nowemacaûnash, Ile give these things.
Nutteaugûash, My money.
Nummaumachiúwash, My goods.

Obs: By this Feasting and Gifts, the Divell drives on their worships pleasantly (as he doth all false worships, by such plausible earthly Arguments of uniformities, universalities, antiquities, immunities, Dignities, Rewards unto Submitters, and the contrary to Refusers) so that they run farre and neere and aske

Obs: Through this feasting and gifting, the Devil encourages their worshippers happily (just like he does with all false worships, using appealing earthly arguments of uniformity, universality, antiquity, immunities, dignities, and rewards for those who submit, while threatening those who refuse) so that they go around, near and far, asking

Awaun Nákommit, Who makes a feast?
Nkekinneawaûmen, I goe to the Feast.
Kekineawûi, He is gone to the Feast.

They have a modest Religious perswasion not to disturb any man, either themselves English, Dutch, or any in their conscience, and worship, and therefore say:

They have a simple religious belief that emphasizes not disturbing anyone, whether they are English, Dutch, or anyone else regarding their conscience and worship, and so they say:

Aquiewopwaûwash, Peace, hold your peace.
Aquiewopwaûwock,
Peeyaûntam, He is at Prayer.
Peeyaúntamwock, They are praying.
Cowwéwonck, The Soule,

derived from Cowwene, to sleep, because say they, it works and operates when the Body sleepes. Michachunck, the soule, in a higher notion which is of affinity, with a word signifying a looking glasse, or cleere resemblance, so that it hath its name from a cleere sight or discerning, which indeed seemes very well to suit with the nature of it.

derived from Cowwene, to sleep, because they say it works and operates when the body sleeps. Michachunck, the soul, in a higher sense, is related to a word meaning a mirror or clear resemblance, so it gets its name from a clear sight or understanding, which indeed seems to fit very well with its nature.

Wuhóck, The Body.
Nohòck, cohòck, My body, your body.
Awaunkeesitteoûwincohòck, Who made you?
Tunna-awwa commitchichunckkitonckquéan? Whether goes your soule when you die?
Anan sowanakitaûwaw, It goes to the South West.

Obs: They believe that the soules of Men and Women goe to the South-west, their great and good Men and Women to Cautantouwit his house, where they have hopes (as the Turkes have of carnall Joyes): Murtherers, thieves and Lyers, their soules (say they) wander restlesse abroad.

Obs: They believe that the souls of Men and Women go to the Southwest, their great and good Men and Women to Cautantouwit’s house, where they have hopes (like the Turks have of earthly pleasures): Murderers, thieves, and liars, their souls (they say) wander restlessly abroad.

[114]

[114]

Now because this Book (by Gods good Providence) may come into the hand of many fearing God, who may also have many an opportunity of occasionall discourse with some of these their wild Brethren and Sisters, and may speake a word for their and our glorious Maker, which may also prove some preparatory Mercy to their Soules: I shall propose some proper expressions concerning the Creation of the world, and mans Estate and in particular theirs also, which from myselfe many hundredths of times, great numbers of them have heard with great delight, and great convictions: which who knowes (in Gods holy season) may rise to the exalting of the Lord Jesus Christ in their conversion and salvation?

Now, since this book (by God's good providence) might end up in the hands of many who fear God, and who may have occasions to talk with some of these wild brothers and sisters, they might share a word for their and our glorious Creator, which could also be a preparation for mercy to their souls. I will suggest some appropriate expressions about the creation of the world and humanity's condition, especially regarding theirs, which I have shared many hundreds of times, and a great number of them have received with great joy and strong conviction. Who knows (in God's perfect timing) it might lead to the exaltation of the Lord Jesus Christ in their conversion and salvation?

Nétop Kunnatótemous, Friend, I will aske you a Question.
Nntótema, Speake on.
Tocketunnántum? What thinke you?
Awaun Keesiteoûwin Kéesuck? Who made the Heavens?
Aûke Wechêkom? The Earth, the Sea.
Mittauke, The World.

Some will answer Tattá, I cannot tell, some will answer Manittôwock, the Gods.

Some will answer Tattá, I can't say, some will answer Manittôwock, the Gods.

Tà suóg Manittowock, How many Gods bee there?
Maunaúog Mishaúnawock, Many, great many.
Netop macháge, Friend, not so.
Paúsuck naúnt manìt, There is onely one God.
Cuppíssittone, You are mistaken.
Cowauwaúnemum, You are out of the way.

A Phrase which much pleaseth them, being proper for their wandring in the Woods, and similitudes greatly please them.

A phrase that really pleases them, being suitable for their wandering in the woods, and comparisons greatly appeal to them.

Kukkakótemous, wachitquáshouwe, I will tell you, presently.
Kuttaunchemókous, I will tell you newes.
Paûsuck naúnt manít kéesittin keesuck, &c. One onely God made the Heavens &c.
Napannètashèmittan naugecautúmmonabnshque, Five thousand yeers agoe, and upwards.

[115]

[115]

Naúgom naúnt wukkesittinnes wâmeteâgun, He alone made all things.
Wuche mateâg, Out of nothing.
Quttatashuchuckqunnacaus keesitinneswâme, In six dayes he made all things.
Nquittaqúnne, Wuckéesitin weqâi, The first day hee made the Light.
Neesqunne, Wuckéesitin Keésuck, The second day Hee made the Firmament.
Shúckqunne wuckéesitin Aúkekà wechêkom, The third day hee made the Earth and sea.
Yóqunne wuckkéesitin Nippaúus kà Nanepaúshat, The fourth day he made the Sun and the Moon.
Neenash-mamockíuwash wêquanantiganash, Two great Lights.
Kà wáme anócksuck, And all the Starres.
Napannetashúckqunne Wuckéesittinpussuck-seesuckwâme, The fifth day hee made all the fowle.
Keesuckquíuke, In the Ayre or Heavens
Kawámeaúmúasuck, Wechekommiuke, And all the Fish in the Sea.
Quttatashúkqunne Wuckkeésittin penashímwock wamè, The sixth day hee made all the Beasts of the Field.
Wuttàke wuckèwuckeesittin pausuck Enìn, or, Eneskéetomp, Last of all he made one Man.
Wuche mishquòck, Of red Earth.
Kawesuonckgonnakaûnes Adam, túppautea mishquòck, And call’d him Adam, or red Earth.
Wuttáke wuchè Câwit mishquock, Then afterward, while Adam or red Earth slept.
Wuckaudnúmmenes manit peetaúgonwuche Adam, God tooke a rib from Adam, or red Earth.
Kà wuchè peteaúgon Wukkeessitínnes pausuck squàw, And of that rib he made One woman.
Kà pawtouwúnnes Adâmuck And brought her to Adam.

[116]

[116]

Nawônt Adam wuttunnawaun nuppeteâgon ewò, When Adam saw her, he said, this is my bone.
Enadatashúck qunneaquêi The seventh day hee rested
Nagaû wvchè quttatashúckqune anacaúsuock, Englishmánnuck, And therefore Englishmen worke six days
Enadatashuckqunnóckat-taubataumwock, On the seventh day they praise God.

Obs: At this Relation they are much satisfied, with a reason why (as they observe) the English and Dutch, &c. labour six dayes and rest and worship the seventh.

Obs: They are very satisfied with this explanation, noting that the English and Dutch, etc., work for six days and rest and worship on the seventh.

Besides, they will say, Wee never heard of this before; and then will relate how they have it from their Fathers, that Kautántowwit made one man and woman of a stone, which disliking, he broke them in pieces, and made another man and woman of a Tree, which were the Fountaines of all mankind.

Besides, they will say, "We've never heard of this before," and then they will explain how they got it from their ancestors that Kautántowwit created one man and one woman from a stone, which he didn't like, so he broke them into pieces and made another man and woman from a tree, who became the ancestors of all humanity.

They apprehending a vast difference of Knowledge betweene the English and themselves, are very observant of the English lives: I have heard them say to an Englishman (who being hindred, broke a promise to them) you know God, will you lie Englishman?

They recognize that there's a huge difference in knowledge between the English and themselves, so they're very attentive to how the English live. I've heard them say to an Englishman (who, due to circumstances, broke a promise to them), "You know God, will you lie, Englishman?"

Nétop kíhkita, Hearken to mee.
Englishmánnuck, Englishmen.
Dutchmánnuck, keenouwin kà wamé mittaukêkukitonck quéhettit, Dutch men, and you and all the world when they die.
Mattux swowánna kit aûog michichónckquock, Their soules goe not to the Southwest.
Wàme, ewò pâwsuck, All that know that one God.
Manit wáwóntakick,
Ewò manìt waumaûsachick kà uckqushánchick, That love and feare Him.
Keesaqut aùog, They goe up to Heaven.
Michéme weeteantámwock, They ever live in joy.
Naûgom manìt wêkick, In Gods owne House.
Ewo manìt mat wauóntakick, They that know not this God.
Matwaumaûsachick,[117] That love.
Màt ewò uckqushánchick, And feare him not.
Kamóotakick, Thieves.
Puppannouwâchick, Lyers.
Nochisquauónchick, Vnclean persons.
Nanompaníssichick, Idle persons.
Kemineíachick, Murtherers.
Mammaúsachick, Adulterers.
Nanisquégachick, Oppressors or fierce.
Wame naûmakiaûog, They go to Hell or the Deepe.
Michem maûog, They shall ever lament.
Awaum kukkakotemógwunnes? Who told you so?
Manittoowussuckwheke, Gods booke or writing.

Obs: After I had (as farre as my language would reach) discoursed (upon a time) before the chief Sachim or Prince of the Countrey, with his arch priests, and many other in a full assembly; and being night, wearied with travell and discourse I lay down to rest; and before I slept I heard this passage: A Qunnihticut Indian (who had heard our discourse) told the Sachim Miantunnómu that soules went up to Heaven, or downe to Hell; For, saith he, our Fathers have told us, that our soules go to the Southwest. The Sachim answered, But how doe you know yourselfe, that your soules goe to the Southwest; did you ever see a soule goe thither? The Native replied; when did he (naming my selfe) see a soul goe to Heaven or Hell? The Sachim againe replied: He hath books and writings, and one which God himselfe made, concerning mens soules, and therefore may well know more than wee that have none, but take all upon trust from our forefathers.

Obs: After I had, as far as my language would allow, spoken at one time before the chief Sachem or Prince of the country, along with his arch priests and many others in a full assembly; and being night, tired from travel and conversation, I lay down to rest; and before I slept, I heard this exchange: A Connecticut Indian (who had heard our discussion) told Sachem Miantunnómu that souls went up to Heaven or down to Hell. For, he said, our fathers have told us that our souls go to the Southwest. The Sachem responded, But how do you know for yourself that your souls go to the Southwest? Did you ever see a soul go there? The Native replied, When did he (naming myself) see a soul go to Heaven or Hell? The Sachem answered again: He has books and writings, and one that God Himself made, about men's souls, and therefore may know more than we who have none, but take everything on trust from our ancestors.

The said Sachim, and the chiefe of his people, discoursed by themselves, of keeping the Englishmans day of worship, which I could easily have brought the Countrey to, but that I was persuaded, and am, that Gods way is first to turne a soule from its Idolls, both of heart, worship and conversation, before it is capable of worship, to the true and living God, according to 1. Thes. 1. 9. You turned to God from Idolls[118] to serve or worship the living and true God. As also, that the two first Principles and Foundations of true religion or Worship of the true God in Christ, are Repentance from dead workes, and Faith towards God, before the Doctrine of Baptisme or washing and the laying on of hands, which containe the Ordinances and Practises of worship; the want of which, I conceive is the bane of million of soules in England, and all other Nations professing to be Christian Nations, who are brought by publique authority to Baptisime and fellowship with God in Ordinances of worship, before the saving worke of repentance, and a true turning to God, Heb. 6. 2.

Sachim and the chief of his people discussed among themselves about observing the English day of worship, something I could have easily achieved for the country. However, I was convinced then and still believe that God's way is to first turn a soul away from its idols—whether in heart, worship, or behavior—before it can truly worship the one true and living God, as stated in 1 Thessalonians 1:9: "You turned to God from idols to serve the living and true God." Additionally, the two fundamental principles and foundations of true religion or worship of the true God in Christ are repentance from dead works and faith toward God, which must come before the doctrine of baptism or washing and the laying on of hands, which include the ordinances and practices of worship. I believe that the lack of these principles is the downfall of millions of souls in England and all other nations claiming to be Christian nations, who are led by public authority to baptism and fellowship with God in worship ordinances before experiencing the saving work of repentance and a genuine turning to God, as referenced in Hebrews 6:2.

Nétop kitonckquêan kunnúppamin michéme, Friend when you die you perish everlastingly.
Michéme cuppauqua neímmin, You are everlastingly undone.
Cummusquauna múckqun manìt, God is angry with you.
Cuppauquanúckqun, He will destroy you.
Wuché cummanittó wockmanâuog, For your many Gods.
Wame pitch chíckauta mittaúke, The whole world shall ere long be burnt.

Obs: Upon the relating that God hath once destroyed the world by water; and that he will visit it the second time with consuming fire: I have been asked this profitable question of some of them, What then will become of us? Where then shall we be?

Obs: When it’s mentioned that God once destroyed the world with water and that He will visit it again with consuming fire, some of them have asked me this important question: What will happen to us then? Where will we be?

Manít ánawat Cuppittakûnnamun wèpe wáme, God commandth, that all Men now repent.

The generall Observation of Religion, &c.

The wandring Generations of Adams lost posteritie, having lost the true and living God, their Maker, have created out of the Nothing of their own inventions many false and fained Gods and Creators.

The wandering generations of Adam's lost descendants, having abandoned the true and living God, their Creator, have made up many false and imagined gods and creators from the nothingness of their own inventions.

More particular.

More specific.

Two sorts of Men shall naked stand,
Before the burning ire
[119]
Of him, that shortly shall appeare,
In dreadfull flaming fire.
First, Millions know not God, nor for
His knowledge care to seeke:
Millions have knowledge store, but, in
Obedience, are not meeke.
If woe to Indians, where shall Turk,
Where shall appeare the Jew?
O, where shall stand the Christian false?
O blessed then the true.

[120]

[120]

CHAP. XXII.

Of their Government and Justice.

Sâchim-maûog, King, Kings.
Sachimáûonck, A kingdome or Monarchie.

Obs: Their Government is Monarchicall, yet at present the chiefest government in the countrey is divided betweene a younger Sachim, Miantunnnômu, and an elder Sachim, Caunoúnicus, of about fourscore yeeres old, this young Mans uncle; and their agreement in the Government is remarkable. The old Sachim will not be offended at what the young Sachim doth; and the young Sachim will not doe what hee conceives will displease his Uncle.

Obs: Their government is monarchical, but right now, the main leadership in the country is shared between a younger Sachem, Miantunnômu, and an older Sachem, Caunoúnicus, who is around eighty years old and the uncle of the younger man. Their cooperation in governance is noteworthy. The older Sachem isn’t upset by what the younger Sachem does, and the younger Sachem avoids actions he thinks would upset his uncle.

Saunks, The Queen, or Sachims Wife.
Sauncksquûaog, Queenes.
Otàn,-nash, The towne, townes.
Otanick, To the towne.
Sachimmaacommock, A Princes house,

which according to their condition is farre different from the other house, both in capacity or receit, and also the finenesse and quality of their Mats.

which, based on their condition, is very different from the other house, both in capacity and reception, as well as in the quality and refinement of their materials.

Ataúskawaw-wauog, Lord, Lords.
Wauóntam, A Wise man or Counsellour.
Wauóntakick, Wise men.
Enàtch or eàtch Keèn anawáyean, Your will shall be law.
Enatch neèn ánowa, Let my word stand.
Ntínnume, He is my man.
Ntacquêtunck ewò, He is my subject.
Kuttackquêtous, I will subject to you.

Obs: Beside their generall subjection to the highest Sachims to whom they carry presents: They have[121] also particular Protectors, under Sachims, to whom they also carry presents and upon any injury received, and complaint made, these Protectors will revenge it.

Obs: Besides their general submission to the highest Sachims, to whom they bring gifts: They also have specific Protectors under the Sachims, to whom they also bring gifts, and in case of any harm done to them, if they file a complaint, these Protectors will take revenge.

Ntannôtam, I will revenge it.
Kuttannótous, I will revenge you.
Miâwene, A Court or meeting.
Wépe cummiâwene, Come to the meeting.
Miawêtuck, Let us meet.
Wauwhàutowash, Call a meeting.
Miawêmucks, At a meeting.
Miawéhettit, When they meet.

Obs: The Sachims, although they have an absolute Monarchie over the people: yet they will not conclude of ought that concernes all, either Lawes, or Subsidies, or warres, unto which the People are averse, and by gentle perswasion cannot be brought.

Obs: The Sachims, even though they have complete control over the people, will not decide on anything that affects everyone, whether it's laws, taxes, or wars, unless the people agree, and gentle persuasion doesn't work.

Peyaùtch naûgum, Let himselfe come here.
Pétiteatch, Let him come.
Mishaúntowash, Speake out.
Nanántowash, Speake plaine.
Kunnadsíttamenwèpe, You must inquire after this.
Wunnadsittamútta, Let us search into it.
Neen pitch-nnadsittamen, I will inquire into it.
Machíssu ewò, He is naught.
Cuttiantacompáwwem, You are a lying fellow.
Cuttiantakiskquâwquaw, You are a lying woman.
Wèpe cukkúmmoot, You have stole.
Mat méshnawmônash, I did not see those things.
Màt mèshnummanmenash, I did not take them.
Wèpekunnishquêko cummiskissawwaw, You are fierce and quarrelsome.

Obs: I could never discerne that excesse of scandalous sins amongst them, which Europe aboundeth with. Drunkennesse and gluttony, generally they know not what sinnes they be; and although they have not so much to restraine them (both in respect of knowledge of God and Lawes of Men) as the English have, yet a man shall never heare of such crimes amongst them of robberies, murthers, adulteries, &c. as amongst the English: I conceive that[122] the glorious Sunne of so much truth as shines in England, hardens our English hearts; for what the Sunne softeneth not, it hardens.

Obs: I could never see the excessive scandalous sins among them that are so common in Europe. They generally don't realize that drunkenness and gluttony are sins; and even though they don't have as much in terms of knowledge of God and the laws of men as the English do, you rarely hear about crimes like robbery, murder, or adultery among them as you do among the English. I think that [122] the bright light of truth that shines in England hardens our English hearts; because what the light doesn't soften, it hardens.

Tawhìtch yó enêan? Why doe you so?
Tawhìtch cummootóan? Why doe you steale?
Tawhìtch nanompaniêan? Why are you thus idle or base?
Wewhepapúnnoke, Bind him.
Wèpe kunnishaûmis, You kild him.
Wépe kukkemineantín, You are the murtherer.
Sasaumitaúwhitch, Let him be whipt.
Upponckquittaúwhitch, Let him be imprisoned.
Níppitch ewó, Let him die.
Niphéttitch, Let them die.
Niss-Nìssoke, Kill him.
Púm-púmmoke, Shoot him.

Obs: The most usuall Custome amongst them in executing punishments, is for the Sachim either to beate, or whip, or put to death with his owne hand, to which the common sort most quietly submit: Though sometimes the Sachim sends a secret executioner one of his chiefest Warriours to fetch off a head, by some sudden unexpected blow of a Hatchet, when they have feared Mutiny by publike execution.

Obs: The most common practice among them when carrying out punishments is for the Sachim to beat, whip, or kill someone with his own hand, and the general population usually accepts this quietly. However, sometimes the Sachim sends a secret executioner, one of his top warriors, to take a head through a sudden, unexpected strike with an axe when they fear rebellion from a public execution.

Kukkeechequaûbenitch, You shall be hanged.
Níppansínnea, I am innocent.
Uppansínea-ewo, He is innocent.
Matmeshnowaûwon, I knew nothing of it.
Nnowaúntum, I am sorry.
Nummachiemè, I have done ill.
Aumaúnemoke, Let it passe, or take away this accusation.
Konkeeteatch Ewo, Let him live.
Konkeeteáhetti, Let them live.

Observation generall, of their Government.

The wildest of the Sonnes of Men have ever found a necessity, (for preservation of themselves, their Families and Properties) to cast themselves into some Mould or forme of Government.

The wildest of the Sons of Men have always felt the need (to protect themselves, their families, and their property) to put themselves into some kind of government structure.

[123]

[123]

More particular.

More specific.

Adulteries, Murthers, Robberies, Thefts,
Wild Indians punish these!
And hold the scales of justice so,
That no man farthing leese.
When Indians heare the horrid filths,
Of Irish, English Men
The Horrid Oaths and Murthers late,
Thus say these Indians then,
We weare no Cloaths, have many Gods,
And yet our sinnes are lesse.
You are Barbarians, Pagans wild,
Your land’s the wildernesse.

[124]

[124]

CHAP. XXIII.

Of Marriage.

Wuskéne, A young man.
Keegsquaw, A Virgin or Maide.
Segaúo, A widdower.
Segoúsquaw, A widdow.
Wusséntam, He goes a wooing.
Nosénemuck, He is my sonne in Law.
Wussenetûock, They make a match.
Awetawátuock,

Obs: Single fornication they count no sin, but after Marriage (which they solemnize by consent of Parents and publique approbation publiquely) then they count it hainous for either of them to be false.

Obs: They don't consider single fornication a sin, but after marriage (which they formalize with parental consent and public acknowledgment), they see it as very serious if either partner is unfaithful.

Mammaûsu, An Adulterer.
Nummammógwunewò, He hath wronged my bed.
Pallé nochisquaûaw, He or she hath committed adultery.

Obs: In this case the wronged party may put away or keepe the party offending: commonly, if the woman be false, the offended Husband will be solemnly revenged upon the offender, before many witnesses, by many blowes and wounds, and if it be to Death, yet the guilty resists not, nor is his Death revenged.

Obs: In this situation, the wronged person may set aside or keep the offending party. Typically, if the woman is unfaithful, the hurt husband will take formal revenge on the offender in front of many witnesses, delivering multiple blows and wounds; even if it leads to death, the guilty party does not fight back, nor is their death avenged.

Nquittócaw, He hath one Wife.
Neesócaw, He hath two Wives.
Sshócowaw, He hath three.
Yocowaw, Foure wives &c.

Their Number is not stinted, yet the chiefe Nation in the Countrey, the Narrigansets (generally) have but one Wife.

Their numbers aren’t limited, yet the main tribe in the country, the Narragansetts, typically have only one wife.

Two causes they generally alledge for their many wives.

Two reasons they usually give for having so many wives.

First desire of Riches, because the Women bring[125] in all the increase of the Field, &c. the Husband onely fisheth, hunteth &c.

First desire for wealth, because the women contribute to all the produce of the field, etc., while the husband only fishes, hunts, etc.[125]

Secondly, their long sequestring themselves from their wives after conception, until the child be weaned, which with some is long after a yeare old, generally they keep their children long at the breast.

Secondly, they isolate themselves from their wives for a long time after conception, until the child is weaned, which for some lasts well over a year. Generally, they nurse their children for a long time.

Commíttamus, Cowéewo, Your wife.
Tahanawatu? ta shincommaúgemus, How much gave you for her.
Napannetashom paûgatash, Five fathome of their Money.
Qutta-énada shoasuck ta shompaugatash, Six or seven or eight fathome.

If some great Mans daghter, Piuckquompaúgatash, ten fathome.

If some great man’s daughter, Piuckquompaúgatash, ten fathoms.

Obs: Generally the Husband gives these payments for a Dowrie, (as it was in Israell) to the Father or Mother, or guardian of the Maide. To this purpose if the Man be poore, his Friends and Neighbours doe pummenumminteáuguash, that is contribute Money toward the Dowrie.

Obs: Usually, the husband makes these payments for a dowry (like they did in Israel) to the father, mother, or guardian of the maid. If the man is poor, his friends and neighbors pitch in, meaning they contribute money toward the dowry.

Nummíttamus Nullógana, My Wife.
Waumaûsu, Loving.
Wunnêkesu, Proper.
Maânsu, Sober and chast.
Muchickéhea, Fruitfull.
Cutchashekeâmis? How many children have you had.
Nquittékea, I have had one.
Neesékea, Two &c.

Obs: They commonly abound with children, and increase mightily; except the plague fall amongst them, or other lesser sicknesses, and then having no meanes of recovery, they perish wonderfully.

Obs: They often have lots of children and grow rapidly, unless a plague hits them or other minor illnesses, and then, with no means of recovery, they die off in large numbers.

Katoû eneéchaw, She in falling into Travell.
Néechaw, She is in Travell.
Paugcót che nechaúwaw, She is already delivered.
Kitummâyi-mes-néchaw, She was just now delivered.

Obs: It hath pleased God in wonderfull manner to moderate that curse of the sorrowes of child bearing to these poore Indian women: So that ordinarily[126] they have a wonderfull more speedy and easie Travell, and delivery than the women of Europe: not that I think God is more gracious to them above other women, but that it followes, First from the hardnesse of their constitution, in which respect they beare their sorrowes the easier. Secondly from their extraordinary great labour (even above the labour of men) as in the field, they sustaine the labour of it, in carrying of mighty Burthens, in digging clammes and getting other Shelfish from the Sea, in beating all their Corne in Morters, &c. Most of them count it a shame for women in Travell to make complaint, and many of them are scarcely heard to groane. I have often knowne in one Quarter of an houre a Woman merry in the House, and delivered and merry againe, and within two dayes abroad, and after foure or five dayes at worke, &c.

Obs: It has pleased God in a wonderful way to ease the pain of childbirth for these poor Indian women. So, typically[126], they have a much quicker and easier labor and delivery than the women of Europe. I don't think God is more gracious to them than to other women, but rather, it comes from two reasons. First, their bodies are more resilient, which helps them endure the pain better. Second, they engage in incredibly hard work (even more than men), carrying heavy loads, digging clams, gathering other shellfish from the sea, and grinding all their corn in mortars, etc. Most of them see it as shameful to complain during labor, and many are hardly heard to groan. I've often seen a woman cheerful in the house, deliver, and be merry again within a quarter of an hour, and then be back outside within two days, and after four or five days, working, etc.

Noosâwwaw, A Nurse.
Nòonsu Nonânnis, A sucking Child.
Wunnunògan, A Breast.
Wunnunnóganash, Breasts.
Munnúnnug, Milke.
Aumaúneman, To take from the breast, or weane.

Obs: they put away (as in Israell) frequently for other occasions besides adultery, yet I know many Couples that have lived twenty, thirty, forty yeares together.

Obs: they often set aside (like in Israel) for other reasons besides adultery, yet I know many couples who have lived together for twenty, thirty, or even forty years.

Npakétam, I will put her away.
Npakénaqnn, I am put away.
Aquiepakétash, Doe not put away.
Aquèipokesháttous Doe not break the knot of Marriage.
Awetawátuonck,
Tackquiúwock, Twins.
Towiû ûwock, Orphans.
Ntouwiû, I am an Orphane.
Wáuchaûnat, A Guardian.
Wauchaúamachick, Guardians.
Nullóquaso, My charge or Pupill, or Ward.
Peewaûqun, Looke well to him, &c.

[127]

[127]

Generall Observation of their Marriage.

God hath planted in the Hearts of the Wildest of the sonnes of Men, an High and Honourable esteeme of the Marriage bed, insomuch that they universally submit unto it, and hold the Violation of that Bed, Abominable, and accordingly reape the Fruit thereof in the abundance of posterity.

God has placed in the hearts of even the wildest of men a high and honorable regard for marriage. They universally respect it and view the violation of that bond as disgraceful, reaping the rewards of this respect in the abundance of their descendants.

More particular.

More specific.

When Indians heare that some there are,
(That Men the Papists call)
Forbidding Marriage Bed and yet,
To thousand Whoredomes fall:
They aske if such doe goe in cloathes,
And whether God they know?
And when they heare they’re richly clad,
Know God, yet practice so,
No sure they’re Beasts not men (say they)
Men’s shame and joule disgrace,
Or men have mixt with Beasts and so,
Brought forth that monstrous Race.

[128]

[128]

CHAP. XXIV.

Concerning their Coyne.

The Indians are ignorant of Europes Coyne; yet they have given a name to ours, and call it Monèash from the English money.

The Indians are unaware of European currency; yet they have named ours and call it Monèash, derived from English money.

Their owne is of two sorts; one white, which they make of the stem or stocke of the Periwincle, which they call, Meteaûhock, when all the shell is broken off: and of this sort six of their small Beads (which they make with holes to string the bracelets) are currant with the English for a Peny.

Their own comes in two types; one is white, made from the stem or stalk of the Periwinkle, which they call Meteaûhock, after all the shell has been removed. Six of these small beads (which they create with holes for stringing bracelets) are valued by the English at one penny.

The second is black, inclining to blew, which is made of the shell of a fish, which some English call Hens, Poquaûhock, and of this sort three make an English peny.

The second is black, leaning towards blue, made from the shell of a fish that some English people call Hens, Poquaûhock, and three of these make an English penny.

They that live upon the Sea side generally make of it, and as many make as will.

They who live by the seaside usually take advantage of it, and many do as much as they can.

The Indians bring downe all their sorts of Furs, which they take in the countrey, both to the Indians and to the English for this Indian Money: this Money the English, French and Dutch, trade to the Indians, six hundred miles in severall parts (North and South from New-England) for their Furres, and whatsoever they stand in need of from them: as Corne, Venison, &c.

The Indigenous people bring all their types of furs that they collect in the country to trade with both the Indigenous and the English for this Native currency: the English, French, and Dutch trade this currency to the Indigenous people six hundred miles in different areas (North and South of New England) for their furs and whatever else they need from them, like corn, venison, etc.

Nquittómpscat,   1 peny.
Neesaúmscat,   2 pence.
Shwaúmscat,   3 pence.
Yowómscat,   4 pence.
Napannetashaúmscat,   5 pence.
Quttatashaúmscat, or quttauatu,   6 pence.
Enadatashaúmscat,   7 pence.
Shwoasuck tashaúmscat,[129]   8 pence.
Paskugittashaúmscat,   9 pence.
Piuckquaúmscat, 10 pence.
Piuckquaúmscatnabnaqùit, 11 pence.
Piuck quamúscat nabnées, &c. 12 pence.

Obs: This they call Neén, which is two of their Quáttuatues, or six pence.

Obs: They call this Neén, which equals two of their Quáttuatues, or six pence.

Piuckquaúmscat nabnashoàsuck, which they call Shwìn. 18d.   3 quttáuatues.
Neesneecheckaúmscat nab yòh, or, yowin, 2s.   4 quttáuatues.
Shwinchékaúmscat, or napannetashin, 2s. 6d.   5 quttáuatues.
Shwinchekaúmscat, 2s. 6d.   6 quttáuatues.
Yow innchekaúmscat nab neèse, 3s. 6d.   7 quttáuatues.
Yowinncheckaúmscat nabnashòasuck, 4s.   8 quttáuatues.
Napannetashwincheckáumscat nab yòh, 4s. 6d.   9 quttáuatues.
Quttatashincheck aumscat, or more commonly used Puickquat, 5s.   10 quttáuatues or 10 six pences.

Obs: This Piúckquat being sixtie pence, they call Nquittómpeg, or Nquitnishcaûsu, that is, one fathom, 5 shillings.

Obs: This Piúckquat costs sixty pence, which they call Nquittómpeg, or Nquitnishcaûsu, meaning one fathom, 5 shillings.

This one fathom of this their stringed money, now worth of the English but five shillings (sometimes more) some few yeeres since was worth nine, and sometimes ten shillings per Fathome: the fall is occasioned by the fall of Beaver in England. The Natives are very impatient, when for English commodities they pay so much more of their money, and not understanding the cause of it; and many say the English cheat and deceive them, though I have laboured to make them understand the reason of it.

This one measure of their stringed money, which is now worth only five shillings (sometimes a bit more), was worth nine or even ten shillings a few years ago. The drop in value is caused by the decline of Beaver in England. The Natives are really frustrated because they have to spend so much more of their money for English goods, and they don’t understand why. Many say the English cheat and deceive them, even though I've tried to explain the reason to them.

Neesaumpaúgatuck, 10 shil.   2 Fathom.
Shwaumpáugatuck, 15 shil.   3 Fathom.
Yowompáugatuck, &c. 20 shil.   4 Fathom
Piuckquampáugatuck, or, Nquit pàusck,[130] 50 shil.   10 Fathom.
Neespausuckquompáugatuck, 5 lib’   20 Fathome.
Shwepaûsuck, Yowe paûsuck, &c. 30 Fathome.
Nquittemittannauganompáugatuck, 40 Fathome, or, 10 pounds.
Tashincheckompaúgatuck? How many Fathom?

Obs: Their white they call Wompam (which signifies white): their black Suckauhock (Sácki signifying blacke.)

Obs: Their white is called Wompam (which means white); their black is Suckauhock (Sácki meaning black).

Both amongst themselves, as also the English and Dutch, the blacke peny is two pence white; the blacke fathom double, or, two fathom of white.

Both among themselves, as well as the English and Dutch, the black penny is worth two white pence; the black fathom is double, or two fathoms of white.

Wepekuttassamompatimmin, Change my money.
Suckaúhock nausakésachick, The blacke money.
Wauômpeg, or Wauompésichick-mèsim, Give me white.
Assawompatittea, Come, let us change.
Anâwsuck, Shells.
Meteaûhock, The Periwinckle.
Suckauanaûsuck, The blacke shells.
Suckauaskéesaquash, The blacke eyes, or,

that part of the shel-fish called Poquaûhock (or Hens) broken out neere the eyes, of which they make the blacke.

that part of the shellfish called Poquaûhock (or Hens) broken out near the eyes, of which they make the black.

Puchwhéganash and Múcksuck, Awle blades.
Papuckakiuash, Brittle or breaking,

which they desire to be hardened to a brittle temper.

which they want to become hard and brittle.

Obs: Before ever they had awle blades from Europe, they made shift to bore this their shell money with stones, and to fell their trees with stone set in a wooden staff, and used wooden howes; which some old and poore women (fearfull to leave the old tradition) use to this day.

Obs: Before they ever had any metal blades from Europe, they managed to drill holes in their shell money using stones, and to cut down their trees with stones fixed in a wooden stick, and used wooden axes; which some old and poor women (afraid to abandon the old tradition) still use today.

Natouwúmpitea, A Coyner or Minter.
Nnanatouwúmpiteem, I cannot coyne.
Natouwómpitees,[131] Make money or Coyne.
Puckhûmmin, To bore through.
Puckwhegonnaûtick, The awle blade sticks.
Tutteputch anâwsin, To smooth them, which they doe on stones.
Qussûck-anash, Stone, stones.
Cauómpsk, A whetstone.
Nickáutick, A kind of wooden Pincers or Vice.
Enomphómmin, To thread or string.
Aconaqúnnaûog, Thread the Beads.
Enomphómmin, Thread, or string these.
Enomphósachick, Strung ones.
Sawhoog & Sawhósachick, Loose Beads.
Naumpacoûin, To hang about the necke.

Obs: They hang these strings of money about their necks and wrists; as also upon the necks and wrists of their wives and children.

Obs: They wear these strings of money around their necks and wrists, as well as on the necks and wrists of their wives and children.

Máchequoce, a Girdle; which they make curiously of one, two, three, foure and five inches thicknesse and more, of this money which (sometimes to the value of ten pounds and more) they weare about their middle and as a scarfe about their shoulders and breasts.

Máchequoce, a Girdle; which they skillfully make from one to five inches thick or more, using this money which (at times worth ten pounds or more) they wear around their waist and as a scarf over their shoulders and chest.

Yea, the Princes make rich Caps and Aprons (or small breeches) of these Beads thus curiously strung into many formes and figures: their blacke and white finely mixt together.

Yeah, the princes make fancy hats and aprons (or small pants) from these beads, which are carefully strung into various shapes and designs: their black and white mixed together beautifully.

Observations generall of their Coyne.

The sonnes of men having lost their Maker, the true and onely Treasure, dig downe to the bowels of the earth for gold and silver; yea, to the bottome of the sea, for shells of fishes, to make up a Treasure, which can never truly enrich nor satisfie.

The sons of men, having lost their Creator, the true and only Treasure, dig deep into the earth for gold and silver; yes, even to the bottom of the sea for fish shells, to create a treasure that can never truly enrich or satisfy.

More particular.

More specific.

The Indians prize not English gold,
Nor English, Indians shell:
Each in his place shall passe for ought.
What ere Men buy or sell.
[132]
English and Indians all passe hence,
To an eternall place,
Where shels nor finest golds’ worth ought,
Where noughts’ worth ought but Grace.
This Coyne the Indians know not of,
Who knowes how soone they may?
The English knowing, prize it not,
But fling’t like drosse away.

[133]

[133]

CHAP. XXV.

Of their Buying and Selling.

Anaqushaúog,
or Traders.
Anaqushánchick,
Anaqushénto, Let us trade.
Cuttasha? Have you this or that?
Cowachaúnam?
Nítasha, I have.
Nowachaunum,
Nquénowhick, I want this, &c.
Nowèkineam, I like this.
Nummachinnámmin, I doe not like.
Máunetash nquénowhick, I want many things.
Cuttattaúamish, I will buy this of you.
Nummouanaquish, I come to buy.
Mouanaqushaûog, Chapmen.
Mounaqushánchick,

Obs: Amongst themselves they trade their Corne, skins, Coates, Venison, Fish, &c. and sometimes come ten or twenty in a Company to trade amongst the English.

Obs: They trade their corn, skins, coats, venison, fish, etc., and sometimes come in groups of ten or twenty to trade with the English.

They have some who follow onely making of Bowes, some Arrowes, some Dishes (and the women make all their Earthen Vessells) some follow fishing, some hunting: most on the Sea side make Money, and Store up shells in Summer against Winter whereof to make their money.

They have some people who only make bows, some who make arrows, some who make dishes (and the women make all their clay pots), some who fish, and some who hunt. Most of those on the seaside make money and collect shells in the summer to use during the winter to make their money.

Nummautanaqúsh, I have bought.
Cummanóhamin? Have you bought?
Cummanohamoúsh, I will buy of you.
Nummautanóhamin, I have bought.
Kunnauntatáumish, I come to buy this.
Comaunekunnuo? Have you any cloth?
Koppócki, Thick cloth.
Wassáppi,[134] Thin.
Súckinuit, Black, or blackish.
Mishquinuit, Red Cloth.
Wómpinuit, White cloth.

Obs: They all generally prize a Mantle of English or Dutch Cloth before their owne wearing of Skins and Furres, because they are warme enough and Lighter.

Obs: They all generally prefer a cloak made of English or Dutch cloth over wearing skins and furs because they are warm enough and lighter.

Wompeqûayi, Cloth inclining to white,

which they like not, but desire to have a sad colour without any whitish haires suiting with their own naturall Temper, which inclines to sadnese.

which they don’t like, but want to have a somber color without any gray hairs that match their own natural temperament, which tends toward sadness.

Etouwawâyi, Wollie on both sides.
Muckûcki, Bare without wool.
Chechéke maútsha, Long lasting.
Qúnnascat, Of a great breadth.
Túockquscat, Of little breadth.
Wùss, The Edge or list.
Aumpácunnish, Open it.
Tuttepàcunnish, Fold it up.
Mat Weshegganùnno, There is no work on it.
Tanógganish, Shake it.
Wúskanuit, New Cloth.
Tanócki, tanócksha, It is torne or rent.
Eatawûs, It is Old.
Quttaûnch, Feele it.
Audtà, A paire of small breeches or Apron.

Cuppàmirh, I will pay you, which is a word newly made from the English word pay.

Cuppàmirh, I'll pay you, a term recently created from the English word pay.

Tahenautu? What price?
Tummòck cumméinsh, I will pay you Beaver.
Teaûguock Cumméinsh, I will give you Money.
Wauwunnegachick, Very good.

Obs: They have great difference of their Coyne as the English have: Some that will not passe without Allowance and some again made of a Counterfeit shell, and their very blacke counterfeited by a Stone and other Materialls; yet I never knew any of them much deceived, for their danger of being deceived (in these things of Earth) makes them cautelous.

Obs: They have a big difference in their coins like the English do: some that won’t pass without approval and others made from fake materials, with their very dark color mimicked by a stone and other substances; yet I've never known any of them to be greatly fooled, because their fear of being tricked (in these earthly matters) makes them careful.

Cosaúmawem, You aske too much.
Kuttíackqussaûwew,[135] You are very hard.
Aquie iackqussaûme, Be not so hard.
Aquie Wussaúmowash, Doe not aske much.
Tashin Commê sim? How much shall I give you?
Kutteaûg Commeinsh, I will give you your money.
Nkèke Comméinsh, I will give you an Otter.
Coanombuqusse, You have deceived,
Kuttassokakómme,

Obs: Who ever deale or trade with them had need of Wisedome, Patience and Faithfulnesse in dealing; for they frequently say Cuppánnawen, you lye, Cuttassokakómme, you deceive.

Obs: Anyone who deals or trades with them needs wisdom, patience, and reliability; because they often say Cuppánnawen, you lie, Cuttassokakómme, you deceive.

Misquésu Kunúkkeke, Your otter is reddish.
Yò aúwusse Wunnêgin, This is better.
Yo chippaúatu, This is of another price.
Aagausaúatu, It is Cheap.
Muchickaúatu, It is deare.
Wuttunnaúatu, It is worth it.
Wunishaúnto, Let us agree.
Aquie neesquttónckqussish, Doe not make adoe.
Wuché nquittompscat, About a penny.

They are marvellous subtle in their Bargaines to save a penny; And very suspicous that English Men labour to deceive them: Therefore they will beate all markets and try all places, and runne twenty, thirty, yea forty mile, and more, and lodge in the Woods to save sixpence.

They are incredibly clever in their efforts to save a penny. They are also quite suspicious that English people are trying to trick them. Therefore, they will visit all the markets, check out various locations, and travel twenty, thirty, even forty miles or more, and camp in the woods just to save sixpence.

Cummámmenash nitteaúguash? Will you have my money?
Nonânum, Nòonshem. I cannot.
Tawhitch nonanumêan? Why can you not?
Macháge nkóckie, I get nothing.
Tashaumskussayicommesim? How many spans will you give me?
Neesaumsqussáyi, Two spans.
Shwaumscusscáyi, Three spans.
Yowompscussáyi, Foure spans.
Napannetashaumscussâyi, Five spans.
Quttatashaumskussáyi,[136] Six spans.
Endatashaumscussâyì, Seven spans.
Enadatashaumskuttonâyi, Seven spans.
Cowénaweke, You are a rich Man.

Obs: They will often confesse, for their own ends, that the English are richer and wiser, and valianter than themselves; yet it is for their own ends, and therefore they adde Nanoùe, give me this or that, a disease which they are generally infected with; some more ingenuous, scorne it, but I have often seene an Indian with great quantities of money about him beg a Knife of an English man who happily hath had never a penny of money.

Obs: They often admit, for their own reasons, that the English are richer, smarter, and braver than they are; but it's for their own benefit. That's why they say things like “give me this or that,” a habit they usually have. Some are more straightforward and dismiss it, but I've often seen an Indian with a lot of money on him begging an Englishman who happens to have no money at all for a knife.

Akétash-tamòke, Tell my money.
Now ánnakese, I have mis-told.
Cosaûmakese, You have told too much.
Cunnoónakese, You have told too little.
Shoo kekíneass, Looke here.
Wunêtu nitteaûg, My money is very good.
Mamattissuôgkutteaûquock, Your Beads are naught.
Tashin mesh commaûg? How much have you given?
Chichêgin, A Hatchet.
Anaskúnck, A Howe.
Maumichémanege, A Needle.
Cuttatuppaúnamum, Take a measure.
Tatuppauntúhommin, To weigh with scales.
Tatuppauntúock, They are weighing.
Netâtup, It is all one.
Kaukakíneamuck, } A looking Glasse.
Pebenochichauquânick?     }

Obs: It may be wondred what they doe with Glasses, having no beautie but a swarfish colour, and no dressing but nakednesse; but pride appeares in any colour, and the meanest dresse; and besides generally the Women paint their faces with all sorts of colours.

Obs: You might wonder what they do with glasses, having no beauty but a dull color, and no style but nudity; but pride shows up in any color and the simplest outfit; and besides, women generally paint their faces with all sorts of colors.

Cummanohamôgunna, They will buy it of you.
Cuppittakûnnemous, Take your cloth againe.
Cuppittakunnamì? Will you serve me so?
Cosaumpeekúnneman,[137] You have tore me off too little cloth.
Cummachetannakunamous, I have torn it off for you.
Tawhìtch cuppíttakunamiêan? Why doe you turne it up on my hand.
Kutchichêginash, kaukinne pokéshaas, Your Hatchets will be soone broken.
Teâno wáskishaas, Soone gapt.
Natouashóckquittea, A Smith.
Kuttattaú amish aûke, I would buy land of you.
Tou núckquaque? How much?
Wuchè wuttotânick, For a towne, or, Plantation.
Nissékineam, I have no mind to seeke.
Indiansuck sekineámwock, The Indians are not willing.
Noonapúock naûgum, They want roome themselves.
Cowetompátimmin, We are friends.
Cummaugakéamish, I will give you land.
Aquìe chenawaûsish, Be not churlish.

Generall Observation of Trade.

O the infinite wisedome of the most holy wise God, who hath so advanced Europe, above America, that there is not a sorry Howe, Hatchet, Knife, nor a rag of cloth in all America, but what comes over the dreadfull Atlantick Ocean from Europe: and yet that Europe be not proud, nor America discouraged; what treasures are hid in some parts of America, and in our New English parts, how have foule hands (in smoakie houses) the first handling of those Furres which are after worne upon the hands of Queens and heads of Princes.

O the infinite wisdom of the most holy wise God, who has raised Europe above America to such a degree that there isn’t a single tool, knife, or scrap of cloth in all of America that hasn’t crossed the dreadful Atlantic Ocean from Europe. And yet, let Europe not be proud, nor America discouraged; there are treasures hidden in various parts of America, and in our New England regions. How have dirty hands (in smoky houses) been the first to handle those furs that are later worn by queens and heads of princes?

More particular:

More specific:

1. Oft have I heard these Indians say,
These English will deceive us.
Of all that’s ours, our lands and lives
In th’ end they will bereave us.
[138]
2. So say they, whatsoever they buy,
(Though small) which shewes they’re shie
Of Strangers, fearfull to be catcht
By Fraud, deceipt, or lie.
3. Indians and English feare deceits,
Yet willing both to be
Deceiv’d and couzen’d of precious soule
Of Heaven, Eternitie.

[139]

[139]

CHAP. XXVI.

Of Debts and Trusting.

Noónat, I have not money enough
Noonamautuckquáwhe, Trust me.
Kunnoonamaútuckquaush, I will owe it you.

Obs: They are very desirous to come into debt, but then he that trusts them must sustaine a two fold losse:

Obs: They are very eager to go into debt, but the one who trusts them must bear a double loss:

First, Of his Commoditie.

First, Of his Goods.

Secondly, Of his Custome, as I have found by deare experience: Some are ingenuous, plaine hearted and honest; but the most never pay unlesse a man follow them to their severall abodes, townes and houses, as I my selfe have been forc’d to doe, which hardship and Travells it hath yet pleased God to sweeten with some experiences and some little gaine of Language.

Secondly, about his habits, as I've learned through costly experience: Some people are sincere, straightforward, and honest; but most won't pay unless you track them down to their various homes, towns, and places, which I myself have had to do. Despite the difficulty and travel, it has pleased God to soften the hardship with some experiences and a little bit of language learning.

Nonamautuckquahéginash, Debts.
Nosaumautackquáwhe, I am much in debt.
Pitch nippáutowin, I will bring it you.
Chenock naquómbeg cuppauútiin nitteaûguash, When will you bring mee my money?
Kunnaúmpatous, I will pay you.
Kukkeéskwhush,
Keéskwhim, teaugmésin, Pay me my money.
Tawhítch peyáuyean, Why doe you come?
Nnádgecom, I come for debts.
Machêtu, A poore man.
Nummácheke, I am a poore man.
Mesh nummaúchnem, I have been sicke.
Nowemacaúnash niteaúquash, I was faine to spend my money in my sicknesse.

Obs: This is a common, and (as they think) most satisfying answer, that they have been sick: for in[140] those times they give largely to the Priests, who then sometimes heales them by conjurations; and also they keepe open houses for all to come to helpe to pray with them, unto whom also they give money.

Obs: This is a typical, and (as they believe) most satisfying answer, that they have been sick: for in[140] those times they generously support the Priests, who then sometimes heal them through rituals; and they also host open houses for everyone to come and pray with them, to whom they also give money.

Mat noteaûgo, I have no money.
Kekíneash nippêtunck, Looke here in my bag.
Nummâche maúganash, I have already paid.
Mat coanaumwaûmis, You have not kept your word.
Kunnampatôwinkeénowwin, You must pay it.
Machàge wuttamaûntam, He minds it not.
Machàge wuttammauntammôock, They take no care about paying.
Michéme notammaûntam, I doe alwayes mind it.
Mat nickowêmennaûkocks, I cannot sleepe in the night for it.

Generall Observations of their Debts.

It is an universal Disease of folly in Men to desire to enter into not onely necessary, but unnecessary and tormenting debts, contrary to the command of the only wise God: Owe nothing to any man, but that you love each other.

It is a universal problem for people to want to take on not just necessary but also unnecessary and painful debts, going against the command of the only wise God: Owe nothing to anyone except for your love for one another.

More particular

More specific

I have heard ingenuous Indians say,
In debts, they could not sleepe;
How far worse are such English then,
Who love in debt to keepe?
If Debts of pounds cause restlesse nights
In trade with man and man,
How hard’s that heart that millions owes
To God, and yet sleepe can?
Debts paid, sleep’s sweet, sins paid Death’s Sweet,
Death’s night then’s turned to light;
Who dies in sinnes unpaid, that soule
His light’s eternall night.

[141]

[141]

CHAP. XXVII.

Of their Hunting, &c.

Wee shall not name over the severall sorts of Beasts which we named in the Chapter of Beasts.

We won't list all the different kinds of animals that we mentioned in the Chapter of Beasts.

The Natives hunt two wayes: First, when they pursue their game (especially Deere, which is the generall and wonderfull plenteous hunting in the Countrey:) I say, they pursue in twentie, fortie, fiftie yea, two or three hundred in a company, (as I have seene) when they drive the woods before them. Secondly. They hunt by Traps of severall sorts, to which purpose after they have observed, in spring time and Summer, the haunt of the Deere, then about Harvest, they goe ten or twentie together, and sometimes more, and withall (if it be not too farre) wives and children also, where they build up little hunting houses of Barks and Rushes (not comparable to their dwelling houses) and so each man takes his bounds of two, three, or foure miles, where he sets thirty, forty or fiftie Traps, and baits his Traps with that food the Deere loves, and once in two dayes he walkes his round to view his Traps.

The Natives hunt in two ways: First, when they chase their game (especially deer, which is the most common and abundant hunting in the area): they can hunt in groups of twenty, forty, fifty, or even two or three hundred (which I've seen) as they drive the animals through the woods. Second, they hunt using various types of traps. They observe the deer’s habits in the spring and summer, and then around harvest time, they gather in groups of ten or twenty, sometimes more, along with their wives and children if it’s not too far to travel. They build small hunting shelters made of bark and rushes (which aren’t comparable to their permanent homes), and each person sets boundaries of two, three, or four miles where they place thirty, forty, or fifty traps, baiting them with the food the deer enjoy. Every two days, they walk their rounds to check their traps.

Ntauchaûmen, I goe to hunt.
Ncáttiteam weeyoùs, I long for Venison.
Auchaûtuck, Let us hunt.
Nowetauchaûmen, I will hunt with you.
Anúmwock, Dogs.
Kemehétteas, Creepe.
Pitch nkemehétteem, I will creepe.
Pumm púmmoke, Shoote.
Uppetetoúa, A man shot accidentally.
Ntaumpauchaúmen, I come from hunting.
Cutchashineánna? How many have you kild?
Nneesnneánna, I have kild two.
Shwinneànna, Three.
Nyowinneánna,[142] Foure.
Npiuckwinneánna, Ten, &c.
Nneesneechecttashínneanna, Twentie.
Nummouashàwmen, I goe to set Traps.
Apè hana, Trap, Traps.
Asháppock, Hempe.
Masaûnock, Flaxe.
Wuskapéhana, New Traps.
Eataúbana, Old Traps.

Obs: They are very tender of their Traps, where they lie, and what comes at them; for they say, the Deere (whom they conceive have a Divine power in them) will soone smell and be gone.

Obs: They are very careful with their traps, where they set them, and what approaches them; because they believe that the deer (whom they think have a divine power) will quickly sense danger and flee.

Npunnowwâumen, I must goe to my Traps.
Nummíshkommin, I have found a Deere;

Which sometimes they doe, taking a Wolfe in the very act of his greedy prey, when sometimes (the Wolfe being greedy of his prey) they kill him: sometimes the Wolfe having glutted himselfe with the one halfe, leaves the other for his next bait; but the glad Indian finding of it prevents him.

Which sometimes they do, catching a wolf in the middle of its greedy hunt. Sometimes, when the wolf is eager for its prey, they kill it. Other times, the wolf, having gorged itself on one half, leaves the other half for its next meal; but the happy Indian finds it first and stops him.

And that wee may see how true it is, that all wild creatures, and many tame, prey upon the poore Deere, (which are there in a right embleme of Gods persecuted, that is, hunted people, as I observed in the Chapter of Beasts according to the old and true saying:

And that we may see how true it is that all wild creatures, and many domesticated ones, prey upon the poor deer, which represent God's persecuted people, as I noted in the Chapter of Beasts according to the old and true saying:

Imbelles Damæ quid nisi præeda sumus?

What are we but prey, weak Damae?

To harmlesse Roes and Does
Both wilde and tame are foes.)

I remember how a poore Deere was long hunted and chased by a Wolfe, at last (as their manner is) after the chase of ten, it may be more, miles running, the stout Wolfe tired out the nimble Deere, and seasing upon it kill’d; In the act of devouring his prey, two English Swine, big with Pig, past by, assaulted the Wolfe, drove him from his prey, and devoured so much of that poore Deere, as they both surfeited and dyed that night.

I remember how a poor deer was hunted down by a wolf for a long time. After a chase of about ten miles, maybe more, the strong wolf finally wore out the quick deer and caught it. While the wolf was eating its prey, two English pigs, pregnant with piglets, walked by, attacked the wolf, drove it away from its meal, and ended up eating so much of the poor deer that they both overindulged and died that night.

The Wolfe is an Embleme of a fierce blood-sucking persecutor.

The wolf is a symbol of a ruthless blood-sucking predator.

[143]

[143]

The Swine of a covetous, rooting worldling, both make a prey of the Lord Jesus in his poore Servants.

The pigs of a greedy, materialistic person prey on the Lord Jesus through His poor servants.

Ncummóotamúck qun natóqus, The Wolfe hath rob’d me.

Obs: When a Deere is caught by the leg in a Trap, sometimes there it lies a day together before the Indian come, and so lies a pray to the ranging Wolfe, and other wild Beasts (most commonly the Wolfe) who seaseth upon the Deere and Robs the Indian (at his first devouring) of neere halfe his prey, and if the Indian come not the sooner, hee makes a second greedie Meale and leaves him nothing but the bones, and the torn Deereskins, especially if he call some of his greedy Companions to his bloody banquet.

Obs: When a deer gets caught by its leg in a trap, it sometimes stays there for a whole day before the Indian arrives, making it an easy target for roaming wolves and other wild animals (most often the wolf) that pounce on the deer and take nearly half of its catch from the Indian during their first feeding. If the Indian doesn’t show up quickly, the wolf comes back for a second greedy meal and leaves nothing but the bones and the shredded deer skins, especially if it invites some of its hungry companions to its bloody feast.

Upon this, the Indian makes a falling trap called Sunnúckhig, (with a great weight of stones) and so sometimes Knocks the Wolfe on the head with a gainefull revenge, especially if it bee a blacke Wolfe, whose Skins they greatly prize.

Upon this, the Indian sets up a falling trap called Sunnúckhig (with a heavy weight of stones) and sometimes knocks the wolf on the head for a satisfying revenge, especially if it’s a black wolf, whose skins they highly value.

Nonówwussu, It is leane.
Wauwunockôo, It is fat.
Weékan, It is sweet.
Machemóqut, It smells ill.
Anit, It is putrified.
Poquêsu, Halfe a Deere.
Poskáttuck & Missêsu, A whole Deere.
Kuttíomp, A Buck.
Paucottaúwat,
Wawúnnes, A young Buck.
Qunnèke, A Doe.
Aunàm, A Fawne.
Moósqin,
Yo asipaúgon, Thus thick of fat.
Noónatch, or, attuck ntíyu, I hunt Venison.
Mishánneke ntíyu, I hunt a Squirrill.
Paukunnawaw ntío, I hunt a Beare, &c.
Wusséke, The hinder part of the Deere.
Apome-ichash, Thigh: Thighes.
Uppèke-quòck, Shoulder, shoulders.
Wuskàn, A bone.
Wussúckqun,[144] A taile.
Awemaníttin, Their Rutting time.
Paushinùmmin, To divide.
Paushinummauatíttea, Let us divide.

This they doe when a Controversie falls out, whose the Deere should bee. Causkashunck, the Deere skin.

This they do when a controversy arises about whose deer it should be. Causkashunck, the deer skin.

Obs: Púmpom, a tribute skin when a Deere (hunted by the Indians or Wolves) is kild in the Water. This skin is carried to the Sachim or Prince, within whose territory the Deere was slaine.

Obs: Púmpom, a tribute skin when a deer (hunted by the Indians or wolves) is killed in the water. This skin is taken to the Sachim or Prince, within whose territory the deer was slain.

Ntaumpowwashaûmen, I come from hunting.

Generall Observation of their Hunting.

There is a blessing upon endeavour, even to the wildest Indians; the sluggard rosts not that which he tooke in hunting, but the substance of the diligent (either in earthly or heavenly affaires) is precious. Prov. 25.

There is a blessing on effort, even for the fiercest individuals; the lazy do not enjoy what they caught while hunting, but the rewards of those who work hard (whether in worldly or spiritual matters) are valuable. Prov. 25.

More particular.

More specific.

Great paines in hunting th’ Indians wild,
And eke the English tame,
Both take, in woods and for rests thicke,
To get their precious game.
Pleasure and Profit, Honour false,
(The World’s great Trinitie)
Drive all men, through all wayes, all times,
All weathers, wet and drie.
Pleasure and Profits, Honour sweet,
Eternall, sure and true,
Laid up in God, with equall paines,
Who seekes, who doth pursue?

[145]

[145]

CHAP. XXVIII.

Of their Gaming, &c.

Their games (like the English) are of two sorts, private and publike; A Game like unto the English Cards, yet, instead of Cards, they play with strong Rushes.

Their games (like the English) come in two types, private and public; a game similar to the English cards, but instead of cards, they play with strong rushes.

Secondly, they have a kinde of Dice which are Plumb stones painted, which they cast in a Tray with a mighty noyse and sweating: Their publique Games are solemnized with the meeting of hundreds; sometimes thousands, and consist of many vanities, none of which I durst ever be present at, that I might not countenance and partake of their folly, after I once saw the evill of them.

Secondly, they have a type of dice made from painted lead stones, which they roll in a tray with a lot of noise and excitement. Their public games involve hundreds, sometimes thousands of people, and are filled with many distractions, none of which I dared to attend, so I wouldn’t support or engage in their foolishness after I learned the harm in them.

Ahânu, Hee laughes.
Tawhitchahânean, Why doe you laugh?
Ahânuock, They are merry.
Nippauochâumen, We are dancing.
Pauochaúog, They are playing or dancing.
Pauochaútowwin, A Bable to play with.
Akésuog, They are at cards, or telling of Rushes.
Pissinnéganash, Their playing Rushes.
} I am a telling, or counting; for their play is a kind of Arithmatick.
Ntakèsemin, }
}

Obs: The chiefe Gamesters amongst them much desire to make their Gods side with them in their Games (as our English Gamsters so farre also acknowledge God) therefore I have seen them keepe as a precious stone a piece of Thunderbolt, which is like unto a Chrystall, which they dig out of the ground under some Tree, Thunder-Smitten, and from this stone they have an opinion of successe, and I have[146] not heard any of these prove loosers, which I conceive may be Satans policie, and Gods’ holy Justice to harden them for their not rising higher from the Thunderbolt, to the God that sends or shoots it.

Obs: The main players among them really want their Gods to support them in their games (just like our English players also acknowledge God). That's why I've seen them treasure a piece of thunderbolt stone that looks like crystal, which they dig up from the ground beneath a tree struck by lightning. They believe that this stone brings them success, and I haven't heard of any of them losing, which I think might be Satan's strategy and God's holy justice to keep them from rising beyond the thunderbolt to the God who sends or strikes it.

Ntaquìe akésamen, I will leave play.
Nchikossimúnnash, I will burne my Rushes.
Wunnaugonhómmin, To play at dice in their Tray.
Asaúanash, The painted Plumbstones which they throw.
Puttuckquapuonck, A playing Arbour.

Obs: This Arbour or Play house is made of long poles set in the Earth, four square, sixteen or twentie foot high, on which they hang great store of their stringed money, have great staking towne against towne, and two chosen out of the rest by course to play the Game at this kind of Dice in the midst of all their abettors, with great shouting and solemnity: beside, they have great meetings of foot-ball playing, onely in Summer, towne against towne, upon some broad sandy shoare, free from stones, or upon some soft heathie plot because of their naked feet at which they have great stakings, but seldome quarrell.

Obs: This arbor or playhouse is built from long poles set in the ground, four squares, sixteen or twenty feet high, where they hang a lot of their stringed money. They have big bets town against town, with two chosen from the rest by chance to play this kind of dice game in front of all their supporters, with lots of shouting and ceremony. Additionally, they have big gatherings for football games, only in summer, town against town, on some wide sandy shore that's free from stones, or on some soft, heathery patch to protect their bare feet, where they have large bets, but rarely fight.

Pasuckquakohowaûog, They meet to foot-ball.

Cukkúmmote wepe, You steale; as I have often told them in their gamings, and in their great losings when they have staked and lost their money, clothes, house, corne, and themselves (if single persons) they will confesse it being weary of their lives, and ready to make away themselves, like many an English Man: an Embleme of the horrour of conscience, which all poore sinners walk in at last, when they see what wofull games they have played in their life, and now find themselves eternall Beggars.

Cuckoo, you’re still at it; as I’ve often told them during their games, and in their big losses when they’ve bet and lost their money, clothes, homes, crops, and themselves (if they’re single) they’ll admit it, being tired of their lives, and ready to end it all, like many an Englishman: an emblem of the horror of conscience, which all poor sinners eventually face when they realize the miserable games they’ve played in their lives and now find themselves as eternal beggars.

Keesaqúnnamun, Another kind of solemne, publike meeting, wherein they lie under the trees, in a kinde of Religious observation, and have a mixture of Devotions and sports: But their chiefest Idoll of all for sport and game, is (if their land be at peace) toward Harvest, when they set up a long house called Qunnekamuck, which signifies Long house, sometimes an hundred sometimes two hundred foot long, upon a[147] plaine neere the Court (which they call Kitteickaûick) where many thousands, men and Women meet, where he that goes in danceth in the sight of all the rest; and is prepared with money, coats, small breeches, Knives, or what hee is able to reach to, and gives these things away to the Poore, who yet must particularly beg and say, Cowequetúmmous, that is, I beseech you: which word, (although there is not one common beggar amongst them) yet they will often use when their richest amongst them would fain obtain ought by gift.

Keesaqúnnamun, another type of solemn public gathering, where they lie under the trees in a sort of religious observation, combining devotion and fun. But their main focus for entertainment is, if their land is at peace, around harvest time when they set up a long house called Qunnekamuck, which means Long House, sometimes a hundred or even two hundred feet long, on a plain near the court (which they call Kitteickaûick). There, many thousands of men and women gather, and the person who enters dances in front of everyone else, prepared with money, coats, small breeches, knives, or whatever they can offer, and gives these things away to the poor, who must specifically ask and say, Cowequetúmmous, which means, “I beg you.” This word is often used, even though there aren't any common beggars among them, whenever the richest among them want to receive something as a gift.

Generall Observations of their Sports.

This life is a short minute, eternitie followes. On the improvement or disimprovement of his short minute, depends a joyfull or dreadfull eternity; yet (which I tremble to thinke of) how cheape is this invaluable jewell, and how many vaine inventions and foolish pastimes have the sonnes of men in all parts of the world found out, to passe time and post over this short minute of life, untill, like some pleasant River, they have past into mare mortuum, the dead sea of eternall lamentation.

This life is just a brief moment, followed by eternity. The improvement or decline of this brief moment determines whether eternity is joyful or dreadful; yet (which makes me shudder to think about) how cheap this invaluable jewel is, and how many meaningless distractions and foolish activities people all over the world have come up with to kill time and rush through this brief moment of life, until, like a pleasant river, they flow into mare mortuum, the dead sea of everlasting sorrow.

More particular.

More specific.

Our English Gamesters scorne to stake
Their clothes as Indians do,
Nor yet themselves, alas, yet both
Stake soules and lose them too.
O fearfull Games! the divell stakes
But Strawes, and Toyes and Trash,
(For what is All, compar’d with Christ,
But Dogs meat and Swines wash?)
Man stakes his Jewell-darling soule,
(His owne most wretched foe)
Ventures, and loseth all in sport
At one most dreadfull throw.

[148]

[148]

CHAP. XXIX.

Of their Warre, &c.

Aquène, Peace.
Nanoúeshin, &
Awêpu,
A peaceable calme; for Awépu signifies a calme.
Chèpewess, &,
Mishittâshin,
A Nothern storme of warre, as they wittily

speake, and which England now wofully, feeles, untill the Lord Jesus chide the winds, and rebuke the raging seas.

speake, and which England now sadly feels, until the Lord Jesus calms the winds and brings peace to the raging seas.

Nummusqâuntum, I am angry.
Tawhìtch musquawnaméan? Why are you angry?
Aquie musquàntash, Cease from anger.
Chachépissu, nishqûetu, Fierce.
Tawhitch chachepiséttit nishquéhettit? Why are they fierce?
Cummusquáunamuck, He is angry with you.
Matwaûog, Souldiers.
Matwaûonck, A Battle.
Cummusquaúnamish, I am angry with you.
Cummusquawnamé? Are you angry with me?
Miskisaûwaw, A quarrelsome fellow.
Tawhítch niskqúekean? Why are you so fierce?
Ntatakcómmuck qun ewò, He strucke mee.
Nummokókunitch, I am robbed.
Ncheckéqunnitch,
Mecaûtea, A fighter.
Mecáuntitea, Let us fight.
Mecaúnteass, Fight with him.
Wepè cummécautch, You are a quarreller.
Jûhettítea, Let us fight.

Jûhetteke, Fight, which is their word of incouragement which they use when they animate each other in warre; for they use their tongues in stead of drummes and trumpets.

Jûhetteke, Fight, is their word of encouragement that they use to motivate each other in battle; they use their voices instead of drums and trumpets.

[149]

[149]

Awaùn necáwni aumpíasha? Who drew the first bow, or shot the first shot?
Nippakétatunck, Nummeshannántam, He shot first at me.
Nummayôntam, I scorne, or take it indignation.

Obs: This is a common word, not only in warre, but in peace also (their spirits in naked bodies being as high and proud as men more gallant) from which sparkes of the lusts of pride and passion, begin the flame of their warres.

Obs: This is a common word, not just in war, but also in peace (their spirits in bare bodies being as high and proud as more gallant men) from which sparks of pride and passion ignite the flames of their wars.

Whauwhàutowawánowat, There is an Alarum.
Wopwawnónckquat, An hubbub.
Amaumuwaw paudsha, A Messenger is come.
Keénomp,      }
Mûckquomp, } paûog Captaines, or Valiant men.
Negonshâchick, Leaders.
Kuttówonck, A Trumpet.
Popowuttáhig, A Drumme.

Obs: Not that they have such of their owne making; yet such they have from the French: and I have knowne a good Drumme made amongst them in imitation of the English.

Obs: Not that they have any of their own making; yet they have some from the French: and I have known a good drum made among them in imitation of the English.

Quaquawtatatteâug, They traine.
Machíppog, A Quiver.
Caúquat tash, Arrow, arrowes.
Onúttug, An halfe Moone in war.
Pèskcunck, A Gunne.
Saûpuck, Powder.
Mâtit, Vnloden.
Méchimu, Loden.
Mechimuash, Lode it.

Shottash, Shot; a made word from us, though their Gunnes, they have from the French, and often sell many a score to the English, when they are a little out of frame or Kelter.

Shottash, Shot; a word we created, although they got their Gunnes from the French, and often sell quite a few to the English when they are a bit off balance or out of sorts.

Pummenúmminteáuquash, To contribute to the warres.
Askwhítteass, Keep watch.
Askwhitteâchick, The Guard.
Askwhitteaûg, It is the Guard.

[150]

[150]

Obs: I once travelled (in a place conceived dangerous) with a great Prince, and his Queene and Children in company, with a Guard of neeere two hundred, twentie or thirtie fires were made every night for the Guard (the Prince and Queene in the midst) and Sentinells by course, as exact as in Europe; and when we travelled through a place where ambushes were suspected to lie, a speciall Guard, like unto a Life Guard, compassed (some neerer, some farther of) the King and Queen, myselfe and some English with me. They are very copious and patheticall in Orations to the People, to kindle a flame of wrath, Valour or revenge from all the Common places which Commanders use to insist on.

Obs: I once traveled (in a place considered dangerous) with a great Prince, his Queen, and their children, accompanied by a guard of nearly two hundred. Every night, we set up twenty or thirty campfires for the guard (with the Prince and Queen in the center), and we had sentinels on duty, just as precisely as in Europe; and when we passed through areas where ambushes were suspected, a special guard, similar to a life guard, surrounded the King and Queen, myself, and some English friends with me. They are very eloquent and passionate in their speeches to the people, igniting a flame of anger, bravery, or revenge from all the usual points that commanders like to emphasize.

Wesássu, Afraid.
Cowésass? Are you afraid?
Tawhitch wesásean? Why feare you?
Manowêsass, I feare none.
Kukkushickquock, They feare you.
Nosemitteúnckquock, They fly from mee.
Onamatta cowaûta, Let us pursue.
Nuckqusha, I feare him.
Wussémo-wock, He flies, they flie.
Npauchíppowem, I flie for succour.
Keesaúname, Save me.
Npúmmuck, I am shot.
Chenawaúsu, Churlish.
Waumaûsu, Loving.
Tawhìtch chenawaûsean? Why are you churlish?
Aumánsk, A Fort.
Waukaunòsint,
Cupshitteaûg, They lie in the way.
Aumanskitteaúg, They fortifie.
Kekaúmwaw, A scorner or mocker.
Nkekaúmuck ewò, He scornes me.
Aquiekekaúmowash, Doe not scorne.

Obs: This Mocking (beween their great ones) is a great kindling of Warres amongst them; yet I have known some of their chiefest say, what should I hazzard the lives of my precious Subjects, them and theirs to kindle a Fire, which no man knowes how farre, and how long it will burne, for the barking of a dog?

Obs: This mockery (between their leaders) really sparks wars among them; still, I’ve heard some of their top people say, why should I risk the lives of my valuable subjects, theirs and mine, to ignite a fire that no one knows how far it will spread or how long it will last, just for the barking of a dog?

[151]

[151]

Sékineam, I have no mind to it.
Nissékineug, He likes not me.
Nummánneug, He hates me.
Sekinneauhettúock,
Maninnewauhettùock, They hate each other.
Nowetompatimmin, We are friends.
Wetom âchick, Friends.
Nowepinnâtimin, We joyne together.
Nowepinnâchick, My companions in War, or Associates.
Nowechusettímmin, We are Confederates.
Néchuse ewò, This is my Associate.
Wechussittûock, They joyne together.
Nwéche kokkéwem, I will be mad with him.
Chickauta wêtu, An house fired.

Once lodging in an Indian house full of people the whole company (Women especially) cryed out in apprehension that the Enemy had fired the House, being about Midnight: The house was fired but not by an Enemy: The Men ran up on the house top, and with their naked hands beat out the fire: One scorcht his leg, and suddenly after they came into the house againe, and undauntedly cut his leg with a Knife to let out the burnt blood.

Once, while staying in an Indian house filled with people, everyone (especially the women) cried out in fear that the enemy had set the house on fire around midnight: The house was indeed on fire but not by an enemy's doing. The men ran up to the roof and used their bare hands to put out the flames. One man burned his leg, and shortly after, they came back into the house and fearlessly cut into his leg with a knife to let out the burnt blood.

Yo ánawhone, There I am wounded.
Missínnege, A Captaine.
Nummissinnám ewo, This is my captive.
Waskeiûhettimmitch, At beginning of the fight.
Nickqueintónckquock, They come against us.
Nickqueintouôog, I will make warre upon them.
Nippauquanaúog, I will destroy them.
Queintauatíttea, Let us goe against them.
Kunnauntatáuhuckqun, He comes to kill you.
Paúquana, There is a slaughter.
Pequttôog paúquanan, The Pequts are slaine.
Awaun Wuttúnnene? Who have the Victory.
Tashittáwho? How many are slaine?
Neestáwho, Two are slaine.
Puickqunneánna, Ten are slaine.

Obs: Their Warres are farre lesse bloudy, and devouring then the cruell Warres of Europe; and[152] seldome twentie slaine in a pitch field: partly because when they fight in a wood every Tree is a Bucklar. When they fight in a plaine, they fight with leaping and dancing, that seldome, an Arrow hits, and when a man is wounded, unlesse he that shot followes upon the wounded, they soone retire and save the wounded: and yet having no Swords nor Guns, all that are slaine are commonly slain with great valour and Courage: for the Conquerour ventures into the thickest, and brings away the Head of his Enemy.

Obs: Their wars are much less bloody and destructive than the brutal wars in Europe; and[152] rarely do twenty people die in a pitched battle: partly because when they fight in the woods, every tree serves as a shield. When they fight in an open field, they engage with jumping and dancing, so seldom does an arrow hit. And when someone is wounded, unless the shooter follows the wounded person, they quickly retreat and help the injured. Even though they have no swords or guns, those who are killed usually fight with great valor and courage: for the victor goes into the thick of it and takes the head of their enemy.

Niss-níssoke, Kill, kill.
Kúnnish, I will kill you.
Kunnìshickqun ewò, He will kill you.
Kunnìshickquock, They will kill you.
Siuckissûog, They are stout men.
Nickummissúog, They are Weake.
Nnickummaunamaûog, I shall easily vanquish them.
Neene núppamen, I am dying.
Cowaúnckamish, Quarter, quarter.
Kunnanaumpasúmmish, Mercy, Mercy.
Kekuttokaúnta, Let us parley.
Aquétuck, Let us cease Armes.
Wunnishaûnta, Let us agree.
Cowammáunsh, I love you.
Wunnêtu ntá, My heart is true.
Tuppaûntash, Consider what I say.
Tuppaûntamoke, Doe you all consider.
Cummequaùnum cummíttamussussuck ka cummuckiaûg, Remember your Wives and children.
Eatch kèen anawâyean, Let all be as you say.
Cowawwunnaûwem, You speake truly.
Cowauôntam, You are a wise man.
Wetompátitea, Let us make Friends.

Generall Observations of their Warres.

How dreadfull and yet how righteous is it with the most righteous Judge of the whole World, that all the generations of Men being turn’d Enemies against, and fighting against Him who gives them breath and Being, and all things, (whom yet they cannot reach) should stab, kill, burns, murther and devour each other?

How dreadful and yet how righteous is it with the most righteous Judge of the whole world, that all the generations of people have turned against Him, fighting against the one who gives them breath and existence, along with everything else, (whom they still cannot reach), should stab, kill, burn, murder, and devour each other?

[153]

[153]

More particular.

More specific.

The Indians count of Men as Dogs;
It is no Wonder then,
They tear out one anothers throats!
But now that English Men,
(That boast themselves Gods Children, and
Members of Christ to be,)
That they should thus break out in flames
Sure ’tis a Mystery!
The second seal’d Mystery or red Horse,
Whose Rider hath power and will,
To take away Peace from Earthly Men
They must Each other kill.

[154]

[154]

CHAP. XXX.

Of their Paintings.

1. They paint their Garments, &c.

1. They dye their clothes, etc.

2. The Men paint their Faces in Warre.

2. The men paint their faces for war.

3. Both Men and Women for pride, &c.

3. Both Men and Women for pride, &c.

Wómpi, White.
Mówi-súcki, Black.
Msqùi, Red.
Wesaûi, Yellow.
Askáski, Greene.
Peshaúi, Blew, &c.

Obs: Wunnàm, their red painting which they most delight in, and is both the Barke of the Pine, as also a red Earth.

Obs: Wunnàm, their favorite red paint, which is both the Bark of the Pine and a red Earth.

Míshquock, Red Earth.
Métewis, Black earth.

From this Métewis, is an Indian Towne, a day and a halfes Journey, or lesse (West, from the Massachusetts) called Metewêmesick. Wussuckhósu a painted Coat.

From this Métewis, there is an Indian town, a day and a half's journey, or less (west of the Massachusetts) called Metewêmesick. Wussuckhósu a painted coat.

Of this and Wussuckwheke (the English Letters,) which comes neerest to their painting, I spake before in the Chapter of their Clothing.

Of this and Wussuckwheke (the English Letters), which is closest to their painting, I spoke earlier in the Chapter on their Clothing.

Aunakêsu, He is painted.
Aunakéuck, They are painted.
Tawhìtch aunakéan? Why doe you paint your selfe?
Chèskhosh, Wipe off.
Cummachiteoûwunash kuskeésuckquash, You spoile your face.
Mat pitch cowáhick, Manìt keesiteónckqus, The God that made you will not know you.

Generall Observations of their Paintings.

It hath been the foolish Custome of all barbarous Nations to paint and figure their Faces and Bodies[155] (as it hath been to our shame and griefe, wee may remember it of some of our Fore-Fathers, in this nation:) How much then are we bound to our most holy Maker for so much knowledge of himselfe revealed in so much Civilty and Piety? and how should we also long and endeavour that America may partake of our Mercy.

It has been the silly custom of all uncivilized nations to paint and decorate their faces and bodies[155] (as it has been to our shame and sorrow, we can recall some of our ancestors in this nation:) How much more are we obligated to our most holy Creator for the knowledge of Himself that is revealed in such civilization and piety? And how should we also long for and strive to ensure that America can share in our mercy?

More particular.

More specific.

Truth is a Native, naked Beauty; but
Lying Inventions are but Indian paints.
Dissembling hearts, their Beautie’s but a lye,
Truth is the proper Beauty of Gods saints.
Fowle are the Indians Haire and painted faces,
More foule such Haire, such Face in Israel.
England so calls her selfe, yet there’s
Absoloms foule Haire and Face of Jesabell.
Paints will not bide Christ’s washing Flames of fire,
Fained Inventions will not bide such stormes:
O that we may prevent him, that betimes
Repentance Teares may wash of all such formes.

[156]

[156]

CHAP. XXXI.

Of Sicknesse.

Nummaúchnem, I am sick.
Mauchinaúi, He is sick.
Yo Wvttunsín, He keepes his Bed.
Achie nummaùchnem, I am very sick.
Nóonshem metesímmin, I cannot eate.
Mach ge nummete símmen, I eat nothing.
Tocketussinámmin? What think you?
Pitch nkéeteem? Shall I recover?
Niskéesaqush máuchinaash, My eyes faile me.
Ncussawóntapam, My head akes.
Npummaumpiteunck, My teeth ake.
Nchesammáttam, I am in paine.
Nchésammam,

Obs: In these cases their Misery appeares, that that they have not (but what sometimes they get from the English) a raisin or currant or any physick, Fruit or Spice, or any Comfort more than their Corne and Water, &c. In which bleeding case, wanting all Meanes of recovery, or present refreshing I have been constrained and beyond my power, to refresh them, and I believe to save many of them from Death, who I am confident perish many millions of them, (in that mighty continent) for want of meanes.

Obs: In these situations, their misery shows that they do not have anything (except what they sometimes get from the English) like raisins, currants, any medicine, fruit, spice, or any comfort beyond their corn and water, etc. In this desperate situation, lacking any means of recovery or immediate relief, I have been forced, beyond my ability, to help them, and I believe I have saved many of them from death, as I am sure many millions of them perish (in that vast continent) due to lack of resources.

Nupaqqóntup Bind my head.
Kúspissem,
Wauaúpunish Lift up my head.
Nippaquóntup,
Mchósamam nsète, My Foot is sore.
Nachàge nickow èmen, I sleep not.
Nnanótissu, I have a Feaver.
Wamekussópitanohock, My body burnes.
Ntátupe nòte, or chíckot,[157] I am all on fire.
Yo ntéatchin, I shake for Cold.
Ntatuppe wunnêpog, I shake as a leafe.
Puttuckhúmma, Cover me.
Pautous nototam min, Reach me the drinke.

Obs: Which is onely in all their extremities a little boild water, without the addition of crum or drop of other comfort: O Englands mercies, &c.

Obs: Which is only in all their extremes a little boiled water, without even a crumb or drop of any other comfort: O England's mercies, &c.

Tahaspunâyi? What ayles he?
Tocketúspanem? What aile you?
Tocketuspunnaúmaqûn? What hurt hath he done to you?
Chassaqunsin? How long hath he been sick?
Nnanowweteem, I am going to visit.

Obs: This is all their refreshing, the Visit of Friends, and Neighbours, a poore empty visit and presence, and yet indeed this is very solemne, unlesse it be in infectious diseases, and then all forsake them and flie, that I have often seene a poore House left alone in the wild Woods, all being fled, the living not able to bury the dead, so terrible is the apprehension of an infectious disease, that not onely persons, but the Houses and the whole Towne takes flight.

Obs: This is all their refreshing, the visit of friends and neighbors, a meaningless and empty visit and presence, and yet this is truly serious, unless it’s about contagious diseases. Then everyone abandons ship and runs away. I’ve often seen a poor house left all alone in the woods, everyone having fled, the living unable to bury the dead. The fear of a contagious disease is so intense that not only people but also the houses and the entire town take off.

Nummòckquese, I have a swelling.
Mocquêsui, He is swelled.
Wàmewuhòck Mockquêsui, All his body is swelled.
Mamaskishaûi, He hath the Pox.
Mamaskishaûonck, The Pox.
Mamaskishaûmitch, The last pox.
Wesauashaûi, He hath the plague.
Wesauashaûonck, The plague.
Wesauashaûmitch, The great plague.

Obs: Were it not that they live in sweet Aire, and remove persons and Houses from the infected, in ordinary course of subordinate Causes, would few or any be left alive, and surviving.

Obs: If it weren’t for the fact that they live in fresh air and keep distance from infected people and places, very few, if any, would be left alive and surviving.

Nmunnádtommin, I vomit.
Nqúnnuckquus, I am lame.
Ncúpsa, I am deafe.
Npóckunnum, I am blind.
Npockquanámmen,[158] My disease is I know not what.
Pésuponck, An Hot-house.
Npesuppaûmen, I goe to sweate.
Pesuppaûog, They are sweating.

Obs: This Hot-house is a kind of little Cell or Cave, six or eight foot over, round, made on the side of a hill (commonly by some Rivulet or Brooke) into this frequently the Men enter after they have exceedingly heated it with store of wood, laid upon an heape of stones in the middle. When they have taken out the fire, the stones keepe still a great heat: Ten, twelve, twenty more or lesse, enter at once starke naked, leaving their Coats, small breeches, (or aprons) at the doore, with one to keepe all: here doe they sit round these hot stones an houre or more, taking tobacco, discoursing and sweating together; which sweating they use for two ends: First, to cleanse their skin: Secondly, to purge their bodies, which doubtlesse is a great meanes of preserving them, and recovering them from diseases, especially from the French disease, which by sweating and some potions, they perfectly and speedily cure: when they come forth (which is matter of admiration) I have seen them runne (Summer and Winter) into the brookes to coole them, without the least hurt.

Obs: This hot house is a kind of small cell or cave, six or eight feet wide, round, built on the side of a hill (usually by a stream or brook). In this, men often enter after heating it up with a lot of wood piled on a heap of stones in the middle. After they remove the fire, the stones still hold a lot of heat. Ten, twelve, twenty or so enter at once completely naked, leaving their clothes, small breeches (or aprons) at the door with one person to watch them. Here they sit around the hot stones for an hour or more, smoking tobacco, chatting, and sweating together; this sweating serves two purposes: First, to cleanse their skin; Second, to detoxify their bodies, which is undoubtedly a significant way to keep them healthy and help them recover from illnesses, especially the French disease, which they effectively and quickly cure through sweating and some potions. When they come out (which is quite astonishing), I've seen them run (in summer and winter) into the brooks to cool off without any harm.

Misquineash, The vaines.
Miqui, neépuck, Blood.
Nsauapaushaûmen, I have the bloody Flixe.
Matux puckquatchìck aûwaw, He cannot goe to stool.
Powwaw, Their Priest.
Maunêtu, A Conjurer.
Powwâw nippétea, The priest is curing him.
Yo wutteantawaw, He is acting his cure.

Obs: These Priests and Conjurers (like Simon Magus) doe bewitch the People, and not onely take their Money, but doe most certainly (by the helpe of the Divell) worke great Cures, though most certaine it is that the greatest part of their Priests doe merely abuse them and get their Money, in the times of their sicknesse, and to my knowledge long for sick times;[159] and to that end the poore people store up Money, and spend both Money and goods on the Powwâws, or Priests in these times, the poore people commonly dye under their hands, for alas, they administer nothing but howle and roar, and hollow over them, and begin the song to the rest of the people about them, who all joyne (like a Quire) in Prayer to their Gods for them.

Obs: These priests and conjurers (like Simon Magus) deceive the people, taking not just their money but also, with the devil's help, performing significant cures. However, it's clear that most of these priests are just exploiting them to get their money during their times of sickness, and I know they actually look forward to sick times; [159] to that end, the poor people save up money and spend both cash and goods on the powwaws or priests during these periods. The poor often die under their care because, unfortunately, they offer nothing but howls and roars, and chant over them, starting a song that the rest of the people join in a choir to pray to their gods for them.

Maskit ponamíin, Give me a Plaister.
Maskit, Give me some physicke.
Cotatamhea, Drinke.

Both which they earnestly desire of the English and doe frequently send to myselfe and others for, (having experimentally found some Mercy of that kind (through God’s blessing)) from us.

Both of which they sincerely want from the English and frequently send to me and others for, (having personally experienced some mercy of that kind through God’s blessing) from us.

Nickeétem, I am recovered.
Kitummâyi nickêekon, I am just now recovered.

Generall Observation of their Sicknesse.

It pleaseth the most righteous and yet patient God to warne and Summon, to try and arraigne the universall race of Adams sonnes (commonly) upon Beds of sicknesse before he proceed to execution of Death and Judgment: Blessed those soules which prevent Judgement, Death and Sicknesse too, and before the eivill dayes come, Arraigne, and Judge themselves, and being sick for love to Christ, find him or seek him in his Ordinances below, and get unfained Assurance of Eternall enjoyment of Him when they are here no more.

It pleases the most righteous and patient God to warn and summon, to test and put on trial the entire human race (usually) on beds of sickness before He carries out death and judgment: Blessed are those souls who address judgment, death, and sickness beforehand, and before the evil days arrive, put themselves on trial and judge themselves, and being sick with love for Christ, find Him or seek Him through His teachings here, and gain true assurance of eternal enjoyment of Him when they are no longer here.

More particular.

More specific.

One step twixt Me and Death, (twas Davids speech.)
And true of sick Folks all:
Mans Leafe it fades, his Clay house cracks,
Before its’ dreadfull Fall.
Like Grashopper the Indian leapes,
Till blasts of sicknesse rise:
Nor soule nor Body Physick hath,
Then Soule and Body dies.
O happy English who for both,
Have precious physicks store:
How should (when Christ hath both refresht,)
Thy love and Zeale be more?

[160]

[160]

CHAP. XXXII.

Of Death and Buriall.

As Pummíssin, He is not yet departed.
Neenè, He is drawing on.
Paúsawut kitonckquêwa, He cannot live long.
Chachéwunnea, He is neere dead.
Kitonckquéi, He is dead.
Nipwì màw, He is gone.
Kakitonckquêban, They are dead and gone.
Sequttôi, He is in blacke;

That is, He hath some dead in his house, (whether wife or child, &c.) for although at the first being sicke, all the Women and Maides blacke their faces with soote and other blackings; yet upon the death of the sicke, the Father, or husband and all his neighbours, the Men also (as the English weare black mourning clothes) weare blacke Faces, and lay on soote very thick, which I have often seen clotted with their teares.

That is, He has some dead people in his house (whether a wife or child, etc.), because although at first, when someone is sick, all the women and girls cover their faces with soot and other black stuff, once the sick person dies, the father or husband and all his male neighbors wear black faces and apply soot very thickly, which I have often seen mixed with their tears.

This blacking and lamenting they observe in most dolefull manner, divers weeks and moneths; yea a yeere, if the person be great and publike.

This mourning and grieving is done in a very sorrowful way for several weeks and months; even for a year, if the person is significant and public.

Séqut, Soote.
Michemesháwi, He is gone for ever.
Mat wònck kunnawmòne, You shall never see him more.
Wunnowaúntam, Grieved and in bitternesse.
Wullóasin,
Nnowantam, nloâsin, I am grieved for you.

Obs: As they abound in lamentations for the dead, so they abound in consolation to the living and visit them frequently using this word, Kutchímmoke,[161] Kutchimmoke, Be of good cheere, which they expresse by stroaking the cheeke and head of the Father or Mother, husband or wife of the dead.

Obs: Just as they express a lot of sadness for those who have died, they also provide a lot of comfort to the living, visiting them often and saying the word, Kutchímmoke,[161] Kutchimmoke, Be of good cheer, which they show by stroking the cheek and head of the Father or Mother, husband or wife of the deceased.

Chepassôtam, The dead Sachim.
Mauchaúhom, The dead man.
Mauchaúhomwock chèpeck, The dead.
Chepasquâw, A dead woman.
Yo ápapan, He that was here.
Sachimaûpan, He that was Prince here.

Obs: These expressions they use, because they abhorre to mention the dead by name, and therefore if any man beare the name of the dead he changeth his name, and if any stranger accidentally name him, he is checkt, and if any wilfully name him he is fined; and amongst States, the naming of their dead Sachims, is one ground of their warres; so terrible is the King of Terrors, Death, to all naturall men.

Obs: They use these expressions because they hate to mention the dead by name. So, if someone has the same name as the deceased, they change their name. If a stranger accidentally names him, he gets reprimanded, and if someone does it on purpose, they are fined. Among nations, mentioning their deceased leaders is one reason for their wars; Death, the King of Terrors, is so fearsome to all mortals.

Aquie míshash aquie mishommoke, Doe not name.
Cowewênaki, You wrong mee, to wit, in naming my dead.
Posakúnnamun, To bury.
Aukùck pónamun, To lay in the earth.

Wesquaubenan, to wrap up, in winding mats or coats, as we say winding sheets. Mockkuttauce, One of chiefest esteeme, who winds up and buries the dead; commonly some wise, grave, and well descended man hath that office. When they come to the Grave, they lay the dead by the Grave’s mouth, and then all sit downe and lament; that I have seen teares run down the cheeks of stoutest Captaines, as well as little children in abundance; and after the dead is laid in Grave, and sometimes (in some parts) some goods cast in with them, they have then a second lamentation, and upon the Grave is spread the Mat that the party died on, the Dish he eat in, and sometimes a faire Coat of skin hung upon the next tree to the Grave, which none will touch, but suffer it there to rot with the Dead: Yea I saw with mine owne eyes that at my late comming forth of the Coun[162]trey, the chiefe and most aged peaceable Father of the Countrey, Caunoûnicus, having buried his Sonne, he burned his own Palace, and all his goods in it (amongst them to a great value) in a solemne remembrance of his sonne and in a kind of humble Expiation to the Gods, who (as they believe) had taken his sonne from him.

Wesquaubenan, to summarize, in winding mats or coats, as we refer to winding sheets. Mockkuttauce is one of the most respected roles, responsible for winding up and burying the dead; usually, this job is held by a wise, serious, and well-respected man. When they arrive at the grave, they place the deceased by the edge of the grave and then all sit down to mourn; I’ve witnessed tears streaming down the faces of even the strongest captains, as well as many little children. After the deceased is laid to rest, and sometimes (in some areas) along with some possessions, there is a second mourning period. They spread the mat on which the person died, the dish they ate from, and sometimes a beautiful hide is hung on the nearest tree to the grave, which no one will touch, allowing it to rot with the dead. Yes, I saw with my own eyes that upon my recent return from the countryside, the most respected and oldest peaceful leader of the land, Caunoûnicus, having buried his son, burned down his own palace along with all his possessions (including many valuable items) as a solemn tribute to his son and as a form of humble atonement to the gods, who they believe took his son from him.

The Generall Observation of their Dead.

O, how terrible is the looke the speedy and serious thought of Death to all the Sons of Men? Thrice happy those who are dead and risen with the Sonne of God, for they are past from Death to life, and shall not see Death (a heavenly sweet Paradox or Ridle,) as the Son of God hath promised them.

O, how terrible is the thought of death for all of humanity! Blessed are those who have died and risen with the Son of God, for they have passed from death to life and will not face death (a heavenly sweet paradox or riddle), as the Son of God has promised them.

More particular:

More specific:

The Indians say their bodies die,
Their soules they do not die;
Worse are then Indians such, as hold
The soules mortalitie.
Our hopelesse Bodie rots, say they,
Is gone eternally,
English hope better, yet some’s hope
Proves endless miserie.
Two worlds of Men shall rise and stand
’Fore Christ’s most dreadfulle barre;
Indians and English naked too,
That now most gallant are.
True Christ most Glorious then shall make
New Earth, and Heavens new,
False Christs, false Christians then shall quake,
O blessed then the true.

Now, to the most High and most Holy, Immortall, Invisible, and onely Wise God, who alone is Alpha and Omega, the Beginning and the Ending, the First and the Last, who Was, and Is, and is to Come; from whom, by Whom, and to whom are all things;[163] by Whose gracious assistance and wonderfull supportment in so many varieties of hardship and outward miseries, I have had such converse with Barbarous Nations, and have been mercifully assisted, to frame this poore Key, which may, (through His blessing,) (in His owne holy season) open a Doore; yea, Doors of unknowne Mercies to us and Them, be Honour, Glory, Power, Riches, Wisdome, Goodnesse and Dominion ascribed by all His in Jesus Christ to Eternity, Amen.

Now, to the Most High and Most Holy, Immortal, Invisible, and Only Wise God, who alone is Alpha and Omega, the Beginning and the End, the First and the Last, who Was, Is, and Is to Come; from whom, by whom, and to whom are all things; [163] by Whose gracious help and wonderful support in so many hardships and external struggles, I have had such interactions with foreign nations, and have been mercifully helped to create this humble key, which may, (through His blessing,) (in His own holy time) open a door; yes, doors of unknown mercies for us and them, be Honor, Glory, Power, Riches, Wisdom, Goodness, and Dominion ascribed by all His in Jesus Christ to Eternity, Amen.

FINIS.

THE END.


THE TABLE.

CHAP. PAGE.
I.   Of Salutation, 27
II.   Of Eating and Entertainment, 33
III.   Of Sleepe, 38
IV.   Of their Numbers, 41
V.   Of Relations of consanguinity, &c.   44
VI.   Of House, Family, &c.   47
VII.   Of parts of body, 58
VIII.   Of Discourse and Newes, 62
IX.   Of time of the day, 67
X.   Of Seasons of the Yeere, 69
XI.   Of Travell, 72
XII.   Of the heavenly Lights, 79
XIII.   Of the Weather, 81
XIV.   Of the Winds, 83
XV.   Of Fowle, 85
XVI.   Of the Earth and Fruits thereof, 89
XVII.   Of Beasts and Cattell, 95
XVIII.   Of the Sea, 98
XIX.   Of Fish and Fishing, 102
XX.   Of their Nakednesse and clothing, 106
XXI.   Of their Religion, Soule, &c.   109
XXII.   Of their Government, 120
XXIII.   Of their Marriages, 124
XXIV.   Of their Coyne, 123
XXV.   Of their Trading, 133
XXVI.   Of their Debts and Trusting, 139
XXVII.   Of their Hunting, 141
XXVIII.   Of their sports and Gaming, 145
XXIX.   Of their Warres, 148
XXX.   Of their Paintings, 154
XXXI.   Of their sicknesse, 156
XXXII.   Of their Death and Buriall, 160

I have further treated of these Natives of New-England, and that great point of their Conversion in a little additionall Discourse apart from this.

I have further discussed these Native people of New England, along with the important topic of their conversion, in a separate additional discourse apart from this.


I have read over these thirty Chapters of the American Language, to me wholly unknowne, and the Observations, these I conceive inoffensive; and that the Worke may conduce to the happy end intended by the Author.

I have read through these thirty chapters of the American language, which were completely new to me, and I think the observations are harmless. I hope this work will help achieve the positive outcome intended by the author.

Io. LANGLEY.

Io. LANGLEY.

Printed according to this Licence; and entred into Stationers Hall.

Printed under this license and registered at Stationers' Hall.


TRANSCRIBER’S NOTE

NOTE FROM THE TRANSCRIBER

Except for those changes noted below, all misspellings in the text, and inconsistent or archaic usage, have been retained.

Except for the changes mentioned below, all misspellings in the text and inconsistent or outdated usage have been kept.

Pg 5: ‘establish an enact’ replaced by ‘establish and enact’.
Pg 6: ‘whom the preident’ replaced by ‘whom the president’.
Pg 7: ‘an acconnt of’ replaced by ‘an account of’.
Pg 12: ‘concluded treates’ replaced by ‘concluded treaties’.
Pg 18: ‘Natives, Salvages’ replaced by ‘Natives, Savages’.
Pg 19: ‘call themselues’ replaced by ‘call themselves’.
Pg 31: ‘seaven yeares after’ replaced by ‘seven yeares after’.
Pg 32: ‘lodge with yon’ replaced by ‘lodge with you’.
Pg 34: ‘Is the water coo.’ replaced by ‘Is the water coole?’.
Pg 41: ‘21’ replaced by ‘21, &c.’.
Pg 41: ‘30, &c.’ replaced by ‘30’.
Pg 44: ‘An Old mn,’ replaced by ‘An Old man,’.
Pg 44: ‘Old men.a’ replaced by ‘Old men.’.
Pg 45: ‘ars distinguished’ replaced by ‘are distinguished’.
Pg 47: ‘of the Couutrey’ replaced by ‘of the Countrey’.
Pg 55: ‘I use is.’ replaced by ‘I use it.’.
Pg 55: ‘too foot long’ replaced by ‘two foot long’.
Pg 62: ‘hey will stile’ replaced by ‘they will stile’.
Pg 65: ‘Ablalive case’ replaced by ‘Ablative case’.
Pg 78: ‘In stormy vvinter’ replaced by ‘In stormy winter’.
Pg 93: ‘Doe you trash?’ replaced by ‘Doe you thrash?’.
Pg 95: ‘Pig, and and rooting’ replaced by ‘Pig, and rooting’.
Pg 113: ‘Men and Women men goe’ replaced by ‘Men and Women goe’.
Pg 118: ‘the Ordiances’ replaced by ‘the Ordinances’.
Pg 126: ‘then the women’ replaced by ‘than the women’.
Pg 134: ‘of Eng- or Dutch’ replaced by ‘of English or Dutch’.
Pg 151: ‘The honse was’ replaced by ‘The house was’.
TABLE: ‘VIII. Of Of Discourse’ replaced by ‘VIII. Of Discourse’.

Pg 5: ‘establish an enact’ replaced by ‘establish and enact’.
Pg 6: ‘whom the preident’ replaced by ‘whom the president’.
Pg 7: ‘an acconnt of’ replaced by ‘an account of’.
Pg 12: ‘concluded treates’ replaced by ‘concluded treaties’.
Pg 18: ‘Natives, Salvages’ replaced by ‘Natives, Savages’.
Pg 19: ‘call themselues’ replaced by ‘call themselves’.
Pg 31: ‘seaven yeares after’ replaced by ‘seven yeares after’.
Pg 32: ‘lodge with yon’ replaced by ‘lodge with you’.
Pg 34: ‘Is the water coo.’ replaced by ‘Is the water coole?’.
Pg 41: ‘21’ replaced by ‘21, &c.’.
Pg 41: ‘30, &c.’ replaced by ‘30’.
Pg 44: ‘An Old mn,’ replaced by ‘An Old man,’.
Pg 44: ‘Old men.a’ replaced by ‘Old men.’.
Pg 45: ‘ars distinguished’ replaced by ‘are distinguished’.
Pg 47: ‘of the Couutrey’ replaced by ‘of the Countrey’.
Pg 55: ‘I use is.’ replaced by ‘I use it.’.
Pg 55: ‘too foot long’ replaced by ‘two foot long’.
Pg 62: ‘hey will stile’ replaced by ‘they will stile’.
Pg 65: ‘Ablalive case’ replaced by ‘Ablative case’.
Pg 78: ‘In stormy vvinter’ replaced by ‘In stormy winter’.
Pg 93: ‘Doe you trash?’ replaced by ‘Doe you thrash?’.
Pg 95: ‘Pig, and and rooting’ replaced by ‘Pig, and rooting’.
Pg 113: ‘Men and Women men goe’ replaced by ‘Men and Women goe’.
Pg 118: ‘the Ordiances’ replaced by ‘the Ordinances’.
Pg 126: ‘then the women’ replaced by ‘than the women’.
Pg 134: ‘of Eng- or Dutch’ replaced by ‘of English or Dutch’.
Pg 151: ‘The honse was’ replaced by ‘The house was’.
TABLE: ‘VIII. Of Of Discourse’ replaced by ‘VIII. Of Discourse’.


Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!